International Codes 2004

STAAD.
Pro 2004

INTERNATIONAL DESIGN CODES

a division of netGuru, Inc.

www.reiworld.com
www.reel.co.uk

STAAD.Pro 2004 is a proprietary computer program of
Research Engineers, International (REI), a division of netGuru,
Inc.

The program and this document have been prepared in accord
with established industry engineering principles and guidelines.
While believed to be accurate, the information contained herein
should never be utilized for any specific engineering application
without professional observance and authentication for
accuracy, suitability and applicability by a competent and
licensed engineer, architect or other professional. REI disclaims
any liability arising from the unauthorized and/or improper use
of any information contained in this document, or as a result of
the usage of the program.

RELEASE 2004

Copyright
Research Engineers, Interntional
Division of netGuru, Inc.
Published June, 2004

About STAAD.Pro 2004

STAAD.Pro is a widely used software for structural analysis and design
from Research Engineers International.

The STAAD.Pro software consists of the following:

The STAAD.Pro Graphical User Interface (GUI): It is used to generate the
model, which can then be analyzed using the STAAD engine. After
analysis and design is completed, the GUI can also be used to view the
results graphically.

The STAAD analysis and design engine: It is a general-purpose
calculation engine for structural analysis and integrated Steel, Concrete,
Timber and Aluminum design.

About the STAAD.Pro 2004 Documentation

The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as
described below.

Getting Started and Tutorials : This manual contains information on the
contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements,
installation process, copy protection issues and a description on how to
run the programs in the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-
by-step explanation on using the programs are also provided.

Examples : This book offers examples of various problems that can be
solved using the STAAD engine. The examples represent various
structural analyses and design problems commonly encountered by
structural engineers.

Graphical Environment : This manual contains a detailed description of
the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered
include model generation, structural analysis and design, result
verification, and report generation. This manual is generally provided
only in the electronic form and can be accessed from the Help facilities of
STAAD.Pro. Users who wish to obtain a printed copy of this book may
contact Research Engineers. See the back cover of this book for addresses
and phone numbers.

Technical Reference : This manual deals with the theory behind the
engineering calculations made by the STAAD engine. It also includes an
explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file.

International Design Codes : This document contains information on the
various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum design codes, of several countries,
that are implemented in STAAD. Generally, this book is supplied only to
those users who purchase the international codes utilities with
STAAD.Pro.

OpenSTAAD : This document contains information on the library of
functions which enable users to access STAAD.Pros input and results
data for importing into other applications.
Table of Contents

International Codes

Introduction i

Section 1 Australian Codes 1-
1A Concrete Design Per AS3600 1-1
1A.1 Design Operations 1-1
1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 1-1
1A.3 Member Dimensions 1-1
1A.4 Design Parameters 1-2
1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration 1-2
1A.6 Beam Design 1-3
1A.7 Column Design 1-5
1A.8 Slab/Wall Design 1-6
1B Steel Design Per AS4100-1998 1-9
1B.1 General 1-9
1B.2 Analysis Methodology 1-10
1B.3 Member Property Specifications 1-10
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library 1-10
1B.5 Section Classification 1-15
1B.6 Member Resistances 1-15
1B.7 Design Parameters 1-17
1B.8 Code Checking 1-20
1B.9 Member Selection 1-20
1B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 1-21

Section 2 British Codes 2-
2A Concrete Design Per BS8100 2-1
2A.3 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations 2-4
2A.7 Slab Design 2-8
2A.8 Shear Wall Design 2-10
2B Steel Design Per BS5950:2000 2-23
2B.1 General 2-23
2B.5 Member Capacities 2-30
2B.7 Design Operations 2-45
2B.11 Plate Girders 2-49
2B.12 Composite Sections 2-50
2B1 Steel Design Per BS5950:1990 2-51
2B1.1 General 2-51
2B1.2 Analysis Methodology 2-52
2B1.3 Member Property Specifications 2-52
2B1.4 Built-in Steel Section Library 2-52
2B1.5 Member Capacities 2-56
2B1.6 Design Parameters 2-61
2B1.7 Design Operations 2-69
2B1.8 Code Checking 2-70
2B1.9 Member Selection 2-70
2B1.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 2-71
2B1.11 Plate Girders 2-72
2B1.12 Composite Sections 2-73
2C Design Per BS5400 2-75
2C.1 General Comments 2-75
2C.2 Shape Limitations 2-75
2C.3 Section Class 2-76
2C.4 Moment Capacity 2-76
2C.5 Shear Capacity 2-76
2C.6 Design Parameters 2-77
2C.7 Composite Sections 2-78
2D Design Per BS8007 2-81
2D.1 General Comments 2-81
2D.2 Design Process 2-81
2D.3 Design Parameters 2-83
2D.4 Structural Model 2-83
2D.5 Wood & Armer Moments 2-84

Section 3 Canadian Codes 3-
3A Concrete Design Per CSA Standard A 23.3 94 3-1
3B Steel Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA S16.1-94 3-9
3B.1 General Comments 3-9
3B.5 Section Classification 3-17
3B.6 Member Resistances 3-17
3C Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code 3-27
3C.1 General 3-27
3C.2 Cross-Sectional Properties 3-27
3C.3 Design Procedure 3-28

Section 4 Chinese Codes 4-
4A Concrete Design Per GBJ 10-89 4-1
4B Steel Design Per GBJ 17-88 4-11
4B.1 General 4-11
4B.4 Built-in Chinese Steel Section Library 4-12
4B.6 Combined Loading 4-18

Section 5 European Codes 5-
5A Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2 5-1
5A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2) 5-1
5A.3 National Application Documents 5-2
5A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors 5-2
5A.5 Columns 5-3
5A.6 Beams 5-3
5A.7 Slabs 5-5
5A.9 Parameter Definition Table 5-6
5B Steel Design Per Eurocode EC3 5-9
5B.1 General Description 5-9
5B.3 Worked Examples 5-20
5B.4 Users Examples 5-37

Section 6 French Codes 6-
6A Concrete Design Per B A E L 6-1
6B Steel Design Per the French Code 6-7
6B.2 Basis Of Methodology 6-8
6B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending 6-9
6B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection 6-9
6B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library 6-12

Section 7 German Codes 7-
7A Concrete Design Per DIN 1045 7-1
7A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations 7-2
7A.7 Slab Design 7-6
7B Steel Design Per the DIN Code 7-11
7B.1 General 7-11
7B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library 7-12
7B.8 Code Cecking 7-21

Section 8 Indian Codes 8-
8A Concrete Design Per IS456 8-1
8A.8 Bar Combination 8-13
8A1 Concrete Design Per IS13920 8-15
8A1.1 Design Operations 8-15
8A1.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 8-15
8A1.3 Design Parameters 8-16
8A1.4 Beam Design 8-16
8A1.5 Column Design 8-20
8A1.6 Bar Combination 8-31
8B Steel Design Per IS800 8-37
8B.1 Design Operations 8-37
8B.3 Allowable Stresses 8-38
8B.3.1 Axial Stress 8-39
8B.3.2 Bending Stress 8-40
8B.3.3 Shear Stress 8-41
8B.3.4 Combined Stress 8-42
8B.5 Stability Requirements 8-42
8B.6 Truss Members 8-43
8B.7 Deflection Check 8-43
8B.10 Member Selection by Optimization 8-44
8B.12 Indian Steel Table 8-47
8B.13 Column with Lacings and Battens 8-55
8C Steel Design Per IS802 8-59
8C.1 General Comments 8-59
8C.2 Allowable Stresses 8-59
8C.2.1 Axial Stress 8-60
8C.3 Stability Requirements 8-62
8C.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement 8-64
8C.5 Code Checking 8-64
8C.5.1 Design Steps 8-65
8C.6 Member Selection 8-66
8C.7 Member Selection by Optimization 8-66
8C.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 8-67
8C.9 Parameter Table for IS802 8-69
8C.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor 8-71
8C.11 Example Problem No. 28 8-73
8D Design Per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code 8-81
8D.1 General 8-81
8D.2 Cross-Sectional Properties 8-81
8D.3 Design Procedure 8-82

Section 9 Japanese Codes 9-
9A Concrete Design Per AIJ 9-1
9B Steel Design Per AIJ 9-11
9B.1 General 9-11
9B.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library 9-12

Section 10 American Aluminum Code 10-
10 Design Per American Aluminum Code 10-1
10.1 General 10-1
10.2 Member Properties 10-1
10.3 Design Procedure 10-3
10.4 Design Parameters 10-4
10.5 Code Checking 10-8
10.6 Member Selection 10-8

Section 11 American Transmission Tower Code 11-
11 Steel Design Per ASCE Manuals And Reports 11-1
11.1 General Comments 11-1
11.2 Allowable Stresses Per ASCE (Pub.52) 11-2
11.4 Code Checking and Member Selection 11-3
11.5 Parameter Definition Table 11-4

Section 12 American A.P.I. Code 12-
12 Steel Design Per API 12-1
12.1 Design Operations 12-1
12.2 Allowables Per API Code 12-2
12.2.1 Tension Stress 12-2
12.2.2 Beam Stress 12-2
12.3 Stress due to Compression 12-3
12.4 Bending Stress 12-3
12.5 Combined Compression and Bending 12-4
12.7 Code Checking 12-7
12.8 Member Selection 12-7
12.9 Truss Members 12-8
12.10 Punching Shear 12-8
12.11 Automatic Selection 12-9
12.12 Chord Selection and Q
f
Parameter 12-10
12.13 External Geometry File 12-11
12.14 Limitations 12-12
12.15 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 12-13
12.16 The Two-Step Process 12-14

Introduction
This publication has been prepared to provide information
pertaining to the various international codes supported by STAAD.
These codes are provided as additional codes by Research
Engineers. In other words, they do not come with the standard
package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented
in this document may be actually pertinent to the individual user's
package. Users may locate the information for the appropriate code
by referring to the Table of Contents shown on the previous few
pages.

This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD
Technical Reference Manual and the STAAD Examples Manual.
Effort has been made to provide some basic information about the
analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach.
A brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with
references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also
provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to
facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the commands and
design parameters. Users are urged to refer to the Examples
Manual for solved problems that use the commands and features of
STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the
clauses in the code that govern the design, users are urged to
consult the documentation of the code of that country for
additional details on the design criteria.

A;lsdflsakf

Section 1
Australian Codes

;asd;ljflksa

1-1

Concrete Design Per AS3600

1A.1 Design Operations
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based
on the Australian code AS3600-1994.
1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design
The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
1A.3 Member Dimensions
Concrete members which will be designed by the program must
have certain section properties input under the MEMBER
PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required
input:
Section
1A
Concrete Design Per AS 3600
Section 1A

1-2

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450
mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with
only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
1A.4 Design Parameters
The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to
perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected
such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design
requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular
design being performed. Table 1A.1 of this manual contains a
complete list of the available parameters and their default values.
It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and
Newton before performing the concrete design.
1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis
Consideration
Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing
compression members. There are two options by which the
slenderness effect can be accommodated. One option is to perform
an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of
axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and
fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces
and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to
approximately magnify design moments.

Section 1A

1-3
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To
perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA
ANALYSIS will accommodate the requirements of the second-
order analysis described by AS 3600, except for the effects of the
duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely
ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of
loads is negligible in a normal structural configuration.

Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an
approximation, it must be realized that the evaluation of
slenderness effects is also by an approximate method. In this
method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical
formula and assumptions on sidesway.

Considering all of the above information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS,
as performed by STAAD may be used for the design of concrete
members. However the user must note that to take advantage of
this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as
primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of
forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during
the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the
proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be
provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically.
1A.6 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these
forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the
critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total
number of sections considered is 13( e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.
75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the
design force envelopes.
Section 1A

1-4
Design for Flexure
Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the
beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face)
moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the
above mentioned sections. Each of these sections are designed to
resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments.
Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If
the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced
section, such a message will be permitted in the output. Flexural
design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass,
effective depths of the sections are determined with the
assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary
design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in
single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed
again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement
provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per AS 3600.
Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in
the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the
detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user
has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at
13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing
can be prepared.

Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and
torsional moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced
sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active
load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity
calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is
based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD
program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the
balance shear forces acting on these sections.

Section 1A

1-5

Example of Input Data for Beam Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.7 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the
ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement.
The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and
circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns are
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four
(4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases.
All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been taken care of in
the column design of STAAD.

Example of Input Data for Column Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
Section 1A

1-6
CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.8 Slab/Wall Design
To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements.
The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2, and
Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual.

Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These
moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section
3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment
is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN,
FC, MAXMAIN, MINMAIN and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are
relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 1A.1
are not applicable to slab design.

LONG.
TRANS.
X
Y
Z
M
M
M
M
x
y
x
y

Section 1A

1-7

Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Table 1A.1 Australian Concrete Design-AS 3600- Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default Value Description
FYMAIN 415 N/mm
2
Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 415 N/mm
2
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.
FC 30 N/mm
2
Concrete Yield Stress.
CLEAR 25 mm
40 mm
For beam members.
For column members
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size.
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of longitudinal
reinforcement in columns.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value defaults
to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This value
defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
Section 1A

1-8
Table 1A.1 Australian Concrete Design-AS 3600- Parameters
Parameter
Name
TRACK 0.0 BEAM DESIGN:
For TRACK = 0.0, output consists of
reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE and
END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
For TRACK = 2.0, required steel for intermediate
sections defined by NSECTION are printed in
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK = 0.0, reinforcement details are
printed.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral
reinforcement.

1-9

Steel Design Per AS 4100 - 1998

1B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the
implementation of the specifications recommended by Standards
Australia for structural steel design (AS 4100) in STAAD. The
design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the
principles of elastic analysis and limit state method of design.
Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking.

The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on
the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and
proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which
they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and
serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is
deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that
a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of
limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.

In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength,
stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member
depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code
checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements
for each selected section are met and identifies the governing
criteria.
Section
1B
Steel Design Per AS 4100-1998
Section 1B

1-10
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD
implementation of AS 4100. A detailed description of the design
process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is
available in the specification document.
1B.2 Analysis Methodology
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments
for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination
loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using
appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness
analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis
may also be performed and the results combined with static
analysis results.
1B.3 Member Property Specifications
For specification of member properties, the steel section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the
syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in
steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the
User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer
to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library
The following information is provided for use when the built-in
steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification.
These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the
properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas
are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered
during the analysis of these members. An example of the member
property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this
section.

Section 1B

1-11
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel
section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical
user interface.

Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.

UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.

20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1

UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB
shapes.

25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8

Welded Beams
Welded Beams are designated in the following way.

25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115
23 56 TA ST WB1200X455

Welded Columns
Welded Columns are designated in the following way.

25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114
23 56 TA ST WC400X303
Section 1B

1-12
Parallel Flange Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel
sections.

1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75
6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380

Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between
them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will
specify a double channel.

11 TA D PFC230
17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5

In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double
channel PFC230 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a
double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units between
the channels.

Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The
standard angle section is specified as follows:

16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and
a leg thickness of 6 mm. This specification may be used when the
local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification
"RA" (reverse angle) may be used.

17 21 TA RA A150X150X16

Section 1B

1-13
Double Angles
Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can
be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD,
respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle,
either SD or LD will serve the purpose.

33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD A75X50X6
43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75

Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)
Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the
designation for the tube is as shown below. This method is meant
for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In
these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size
tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch
size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10
times the width, and 16 times the thickness.

1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0

In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For
example,

6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5

is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length
units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking,
no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this latter manner.

Section 1B

1-14
Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)
Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the
designation for the pipe is as shown below. This method is meant
for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.

1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5
6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5

In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying
the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the
section. For example,

1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0

specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside
diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member
selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter
manner.

Sample File Containing Australian Shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 10
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN
* UB SHAPES
1 TA ST UB200X25.4
* UC SHAPES
2 TA ST UC250X89.5
* CHANNELS
3 TA ST PFC125
* DOUBLE CHANNELS

Section 1B

1-15

4 TA D PFC200
* ANGLES
5 TA ST A30X30X6
* REVERSE ANGLES
6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
1B.5 Section Classification
The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section
elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion.
Steel sections are classified as compact, non-compact or slender
depending upon their local buckling characteristics. This
classification is a function of the geometric properties of the
section. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the
standard shapes and user specified shapes. Design is performed for
all three categories of section as mentioned above.
1B.6 Member Resistances
The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the
procedures outlined in AS 4100. This depends on several factors
such as members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties,
support condition and so on. The procedure adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistance is explained here.
Section 1B

1-16
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on
two limit states. Limit State of yielding of the gross section is
intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The
second limit state involves fracture at the section with the
minimum effective net area. The user through the use of the
parameter NSF (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area.
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on
these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS
4100. Parameters FYLD, FU, Kt and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.

Axial Compression
The compressive strength of members is determined based on
Clause 6.1 of the code. It is taken as the lesser of nominal section
capacity and nominal member capacity. Nominal section capacity
is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net area of the cross section
and yield stress of the material. The user through the use of the
parameter NSC (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area.
Note here, that this parameter is different from that corresponding
to tension. The program automatically calculates form factor.
Nominal member capacity is a function of nominal section
capacity and member slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). Here
user is required to supply the value of
b
(Cl.6.3.3). Table 1B.1
gives the default value of this parameter (named ALB). The
effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be
provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ, LY and LZ
(see Table 1B.1).

Bending
The allowable bending moment of members is determined as the
lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity
(ref. Cl.5.1). The nominal section moment capacity is the capacity
to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed
as the product of yield stress of material and effective section
modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section modulus is a function
of section type i.e. compact, non-compact or slender. The nominal

Section 1B

1-17
member capacity depends on overall flexural-torsional buckling of
the member (ref.Cl.5.3).

Interaction of axial force and bending
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression
and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of
interaction equations. Here also the adequacy of a member is
examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity
(ref.Cl.8.4.5). If the summation of the left hand side of the
equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceed 1.0 or the
allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table
1B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading
condition.

Shear
Shear capacity of cross section is taken as the shear yield capacity.
User may refer to Cl.5.11 in this context. Once the capacity is
obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to
the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios
(for both local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value
provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the section
is considered to have failed under shear.
1B.7 Design Parameters
The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 may be used to
control the design procedure. These parameters communicate
design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow
the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's
specific needs.

The default parameter values have been selected such that they are
frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on
the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter
values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.

Section 1B

1-18
Table 1B.1- Australian Steel Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
KY 1.0 K value for general column flexural buckling
about the local Y-axis. Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general column flexural buckling
about the local Z-axis. Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.
LY Member Length Length for general column flexural buckling
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length for general column flexural buckling
slenderness ratio.
FYLD 250.0 MPa Yield strength of steel.
FU 500.0 MPa Ultimate strength of steel.
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check slenderness ratio against the
limits.
1.0 = Suppress the slenderness ratio check.
2.0 = Check slenderness ratio only for
column buckling, not for web (See
Section 3B.6, Shear)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only minimum design results.
1.0 = Report design strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full details of design.
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required depth (Applicable for
member selection)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the
design strength.

Section 1B

1-19
Table 1B.1- Australian Steel Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
Default Value
Description
IST 1 Steel type - 1 - SR, 2 - HR, 3 - CF, 4 - LW,
5 - HW
PHI 0.9 Capacity reduction factor
NSC 1.0 Net section factor for compression members
= An / Ag
(refer cl. 6.2.1)
ALM 1.0 Moment modification factor (refer cl. 5.6.1.1)
ALB 0.0 Member section constant (refer cl. 6.3.3)
KT 1.0 Correction factor for distribution of forces
(refer cl. 7.2)
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and those
at locations specified by SECTION
command.
1.0 = Perform design for moments at twelfth
points along the beam.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression
of the top flange for calculating moment
resistance.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression
of the bottom flange for calculating moment
resistance.
DFF None (Mandatory
for deflection
check)
Deflection Length/ Maxm. Allowable local
deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of
member
Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of
deflection length
DJ2 End Joint of
member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of
deflection length

Section 1B

1-20
1B.8 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided
section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is
checked as per AS 4100 requirements.

Code checking is done using forces and moments at every twelfth
point along the beam. The code checking output labels the
members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the
TRACK parameter.

Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4

Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic
sections.
1B.9 Member Selection
The member selection process basically involves determination of
the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure
based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The
section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially.
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a

Section 1B

1-21
channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are
originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in
the user table.

Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.

Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4

1B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a
tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of
the AS 4100 specification which governs the design.
Section 1B

1-22

Section 2
British Codes

Kjahds;akh

2-1

Concrete Design Per BS8110

It is strongly recommended that the user should perform new
concrete design using the RC Designer Module. The following is
provided to allow old STAAD files to be run.

STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete
beams, columns and slabs according to BS8110. The 1997
revision of the code is currently implemented. Given the width
and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD
will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and
moments.
perform and control the design to BS8110. These parameters not
only act as a method to input required data for code calculations
but give the Engineer control over the actual design process.
Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional
design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains
a complete list of available parameters with their default values.

Section
2A
Section 2A

2-2

Table 2A.1 British Concrete Design-BS8110-Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
FYMAIN *460 N/mm
2
Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs, it is for
reinforcement in both directions)
FYSEC *460N/mm
2
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a. Applicable
to shear bars in beams
FC * 30N/mm
2
Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar
sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear
reinforcement in beams
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete
surface to closest bar perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable
bars are per MINMAIN above.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. (Only
applicable for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for
bending )
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end of beam. (NOTE : Both
SFACE & EFACE must be positive numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with beam
design report. Column design gives no detailed
results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For
columns gives a detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0
List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at each section
of member
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design moments are magnified
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in
finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit
is 20.
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value default is as
provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value default is as
provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.

Section 2A

2-3
Table 2A.1 British Concrete Design-BS8110-Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column
design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z direction for column
design.
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without
considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used
to calculate WOOD & ARMER moments for
design.
A = Skew angle considered in WOOD & ARMER
equations where A is the angle in degrees.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they
were continuous.
were simply supported.
were cantilever beams.
* Provided in current unit system
Section 2A

2-4
Considerations
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the
slenderness effects in the analysis and design of concrete
members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure
presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section,
the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection
are present and states that these 'secondary' moments are
accounted for by the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the
method used in the design for concrete in STAAD.

Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility,
which allows the effects of these second order moments to be
considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA
analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure, the
additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These
can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of
BS8110.
Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have
certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES
command. The following example demonstrates the required input:

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.

Section 2A

2-5
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular
(450mm depth x 300mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided
for these members. If shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD
and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the
program will calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section
can be considered by using the third definition above.
2A.5 Beam Design
Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of
beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create
moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The
total number of sections considered is ten, unless that number is
redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical
moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed with cut-off lengths calculated to include required
development length.
Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the
procedure includes critical shear values plus torsional moments.
From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing.
The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a
total of two shear regions at each, depending on the change of
shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the
program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -
section 2.4. A table of shear and/or combined torsion is then
provided with critical shear.

Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. Table 2A.2
shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern
developed by STAAD. The following annotations apply to Table
2A.2
Section 2A

2-6
1) LEVEL - Serial number of the bar centre which may
contain one or more bar groups.
2) HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam
in relation to its local y axis.
3) BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying
number of bars and their size.
4) FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start
of the reinforcing bar.
5) TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end
of the reinforcing bar.
6) ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook or
(STA,END) continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the
end (END).

TABLE 2A.2- ACTUAL DESIGN OUTPUT

B E A M N O. 2 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE

LEN - 3854. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 600. mm

LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
mm mm mm STA END

1 29. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES
CRITICAL POS MOMENT = 55.31 KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 3
REQD STEEL = 261.mm
2
, ROW = 0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400, ROWMN = 0.0013
MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING = 189./ 33./ 40. mm
2 565. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES
CRITICAL NEG MOMENT = 55.31 KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 4
REQD STEEL = 261.mm
2
, ROW = 0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400, ROWMN = 0.0013
MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING = 189./ 33./ 40. mm

B E A M N O. 2 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR

PROVIDE SHEAR AND TORSIONAL LINKS AS FOLLOWS

FROM - TO SHEAR TORSN LOAD LINK NO. SPACING mm C/C
mm kN kNm S T SIZE S T S+T S T S+T
END 1 1156 84.4 12 4 2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116
2697 END 2 86.6 12 3 2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116
EXTRA PERIPHERAL LONGITUDINAL TORSION STEEL: 402 mm
2
EVENLY
DISTRIBUTED
* TORSIONAL RIGIDITY SHOULD CONFORM TO CL.2.4.3 - BS8110 *

Section 2A

2-7
2A.6 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the
ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The
loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load and is displayed. The requirements of BS8110 Part 1 -
section 3.8 are followed, with the user having control on the
effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY
parameters as described in table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are
controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then
decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it
requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the
recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code are considered.

Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections.
For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always
assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly
conservative results in certain cases. Table 2A.3 shows typical
column design results.

Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained.
TRACK 0.0 would merely give the bar configuration, required steel
area and percentage, column size and critical load case.

Section 2A

2-8
TABLE 2A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT

C O L U M N No. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S

FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM
2
RECT SIZE - 300. X 600. MM,

AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 875. SQ. MM.

BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION

8 12 MM 0.486 3 EACH END
(ARRANGE COLUMN REINFORCEMENTS SYMMETRICALLY)

BRACED /SHORT in z E.L.z = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 )
BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 )
END MOMS. MZ1 = 1 MZ2 = 25 MY1 = 53 MY2 = 40
SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ = 0 MOMY = 2
DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL LOAD = 84
DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL CAP.= 187
2A.7 Slab Design
Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it
must first be modelled using finite elements. The command
specifications are in accordance with section 5.51.3 of the
Technical Reference Manual.

A typical example of element design output is shown in Table
2A.4. The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is
denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse
reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are those
applicable to slab design:

1. FYMAIN - Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
2. FC - Concrete grade
3. CLEAR - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of
the bar. This is considered the same on both
surfaces.

Section 2A

2-9
4. SRA - Parameter which denotes the angle of the
required transverse reinforcement relative to
the longitudinal reinforcement for the
calculation of WOOD & ARMER design
moments.

Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable.

WOOD & ARMER equations.
Ref: R H WOOD CONCRETE 1968 (FEBRUARY)

If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the
design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the
direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce WOOD &
ARMER moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My
moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be
considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew
reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an
orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle
is given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the
element local x-axis to the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx*
and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.

The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both
directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the
slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:

Section 2A

2-10

TABLE 2A.4 -ELEMENT DESIGN OUTPUT

ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS

MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.
PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm
2
/metre
FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm
2
/metre

ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD
(mm
2
/m) (kN-m/m) (mm
2
/m) (kN-m/m)

WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 13 UNITS: METER KN
LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE
1 0.619 0.249 0.000 2.226 1.855 30.000 TOP
1 0.619 0.249 0.000 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT
3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 1.586 1.358 30.000 TOP
3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT
13 TOP : 195. 2.23 / 1 195. 1.86 / 1
BOTT : 195. 0.00 / 3 195. 0.00 / 3
2A.8 Shear Wall Design
Purpose
Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added
to the features of the program.

Description

The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design
of shear walls. It performs in-plane shear, compression, as well as
in-plane and out-of-plane bending design of reinforcing. The shear
wall is modeled by a single or a combination of Surface elements.
The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the
entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the
wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results
are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than
individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate
required information.

Section 2A

2-11
The program reports shear wall design results for each load
case/combination for user specified number of sections given by
SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The shear
wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes
the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the
concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required
due to out-of-plane shear.

General format:

START SHEARWALL DESIGN
CODE BRITISH
FYMAIN f1
FC f2
HMIN f3
HMAX f4
VMIN f5
VMAX f6
EMIN f7
EMAX f8
LMIN f9
LMAX f10
CLEAR f11
TWOLAYERED f12
KSLENDER f13
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END

Section 2A

2-12
The following table explains parameters used in the shear wall
design command block above.

SHEAR WALL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Parameter
Name
FYMAIN 460 Mpa
Yield strength of steel, in current units.
FC 30 Mpa
Compressive strength of concrete, in current
units.
HMIN 6
Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars
(range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter
bar.
HMAX 36 Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars
(range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter
bar.
VMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range
6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range
6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
EMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located
in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located
in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.

Section 2A

2-13
SHEAR WALL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Parameter
Name
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current units.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement placement mode:
0 - single layer, each direction
1 - two layers, each direction
KSLENDER 1.5 Slenderness factor for finding effective height.

The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and
ends at the shear wall design.

Example

.
.
SET DIVISION 12

SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18

SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
.
.
.
Section 2A

2-14
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68e-005
ALPHA 5.5e-006
.
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END

Notes

1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface
boundary node-to-node segments will be subdivided into 12
fragments prior to finite element mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES
command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support
generation routine. For instance, the line 2 TO 5 GEN PIN
assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5.
As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided
by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an
additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all
13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that
the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to the
user. They are created by the program to enable the finite
element mesh generation and to allow application of
boundary constraints.

Section 2A

2-15
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by
the SURFACE PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS,
respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines
START SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE
command selects the design code that will be the basis for
the design. For British code the parameter is BRTISH. The
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a
list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear
walls and/or shear wall components.

Technical Overview

The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part
1:1997 and relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active
load cases. The wall is designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The
following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections
of the wall set using the SURFACE DIVISION command (see
Description above).

Checking of slenderness limit

The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For
out-of-plane direction, the wall is assumed to be simply supported.
Hence, the provisions of clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are
applicable. The default effective height is 1.5 times the clear
height. User can change the effective height. The limit for
slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken
as 30.

Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall
force output)

Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and
carrying loads to the foundation.

Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated)
reinforcement distance, d, is taken as 0.8 horizontal length of the
wall. Flexural design of the wall is carried out in accordance with
Section 2A

2-16
the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural (concentrated
vertical ) reinforcing is located at both ends (edges) of the length
of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed
over a length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. This
length is inclusive of the thickness of the wall. Minimum
reinforcements are according to table 3.25.

Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall
force output)

Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause
no. 3.4.5.2.

Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12
taking into consideration the effect of axial load. The area of
reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum area
as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.

Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending
(denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force
output)

The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and
bottom), axially loaded with out-of-plane uniform lateral load,
with maximum moments and deflections occurring at mid-height.
Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded column
with uni-axial bending. The minimum reinforcement percentage is
as per table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of
vertical reinforcement is as per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if
necessary are calculated as per the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.

Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall
force output)

The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The
design shear stress is calculated as per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength
of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering
vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear

Section 2A

2-17
reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7
and the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.

Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in
the shear wall force output)

The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane
shear are checked against the whole section subjected to out-of-
plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is the in-
plane shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded
column under uni-axial bending as per the provisions of clause
3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if
necessary, is reported.

Shear Wall Design With Opening
The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear
walls with rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm
has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and
opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected
locations.

Description
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited
number of openings. Due to the presence of openings, the wall
may comprise up with different wall panels.

1. Shear wall set-up

Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface
element perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node
segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of
four edges of the opening(s).

SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1,
..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION
od1, ..., odk
Section 2A

2-18
where:

n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s - surface ordinal number,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node
distance on the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, ..., odk - divisions along edges of the opening.

Note:
If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-
to-node segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then
the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10,
or as previously input by the SET DIVISION command).

Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output
are set as follows:

SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
where:

xd - number of divisions along X axis,
yd - number of divisions along Y axis.

Note:

xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of
the surface where output is requested. The output is provided for
sections located between division segments. For example, if the
number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only
one section (at the center of the edge).

Section 2A

2-19
2. Stress/force output printing

Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined
section of the wall. The general format of the command is as
follows:

PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2)
LIST s1, ...,si

where:

- local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a - distance along the axis from start of the member to
the full cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to ,
delineating a fragment of the full cross-section for
which the output is desired.**
s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation

** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local
axis is directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be
entered.

Note:

If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed.
If command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections
along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be
determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE
DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is
omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section width.

Section 2A

2-20
3. Definition of wall panels

Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:

START PANEL DEFINITION
SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4
END PANEL DEFINITION

where:

i - ordinal surface number,
j - ordinal panel number,
ptype - panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel

4. Shear wall design

The program implements different provisions of design of walls as
per code BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as
follows:

START SHEARWALL DESIGN
(...)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s
TRACK tr
END SHEARWALL DESIGN

Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should
be:

0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default),
1 - full design output will be generated.

Section 2A

2-21
Note:
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross
sections of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the
SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input
values.

a. No panel definition.

Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-
section, located at a distance c from the origin of the local
coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is
provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and
vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to
that of the respective interrupted bars.

b. Panels have been defined.

Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section
located at a distance c from the start of the panel.

Section 2A

2-22

2-23

Steel Design Per BS5950:2000

2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around
the concept of limit state design, used today in most modern steel
design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into
consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their
intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized -
serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate
limit state design are strength and stability while that in
serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors
are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.

In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit
states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This
procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of
allowable member depths, desired section type or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that
code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies
the governing criteria.

The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow
sections are built into the program for use in specifying member
properties as well as for the actual design process. See section
2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections.
In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels,
tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and
angles, there is a provision for user provided tables.

Section
2B
Section 2B

2-24
Single Angle Sections
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000
table 25 we must consider four axes; two principal, u-u and v-v
and two geometric, a-a and b-b. In a TRACK 2.0 design output,
the Buckling Calculations displays results for the v-v, a-a and
b-b axes. The effective length for the v-v axis, L
vv
, is taken as
the LVV parameter or LY * KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b
axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the
connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see
section 2B6.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The
effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the
effective length in the b-b axis as LZ * KZ.

The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been
defined with either an ST or RA specification and is connected by
its longer leg, i.e. a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg.

Local Z
(u-u)
Local Y
(v-v)
a
a
b
b
Local Z
(v-v)
Local Y
(u-u)
a
a
b
b
ST angle RA angle
and USER table angles

Section 2B

2-25
analysis results.
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library
during the analysis of these members.

Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete
listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library
may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.

Section 2B

2-26
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections
available:

Universal Beams, Columns And Piles

All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are
available. The following examples illustrate the designation
scheme.

20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186

Rolled Steel Joists
Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with
the weight omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same
specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be
specified with an "A" at the end.

10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A

Channel Sections
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been
incorporated in STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the
joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be used
with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76

Section 2B

2-27
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them,
are available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify
a double channel, e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc.

51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)

Tee Sections
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead
by referring to the universal beam shapes from which they are cut.
For example,

54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
(tee cut from UB254X102X22)

Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types
of specifications may be used to describe an angle section, either a
standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA specification.
Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification
can be designed.

The standard angle section is specified as follows:

15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
Section 2B

2-28
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis
corresponds to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. If the
local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables,
type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.

35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18

Double Angles
be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front
of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD will
serve the purpose. For example,

14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle
sections.

Note that if the section is defined from a Double Angle User
Table, then the section properties must be defined with an 11
th

value which defines the radius of gyration about an individual
sections principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual, 5.19
User Steel Table Specification)

To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP
followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the
section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for
diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.

10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
(specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)

Section 2B

2-29
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the
outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,

(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of
20 in current length units)

Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if
this type of specification is used.

Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:

TUB 400 200 12.5

Example: 15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0

Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height,
Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations.

(a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units)

Note that only code checking and no member selection is
performed for TUBE sections specified this way.
Square/Rectangular shape
Height (mm)
Thickness (mm)
Width (mm)
Section 2B

2-30
2B.5 Member Capacities
The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic
moment of the section. This is a significant departure from the
standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting
condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a
given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the
basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to
the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this,
sections are classified as either Class 1, plastic, Class 2, compact,
Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender, which governs the
decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity.
The section classification is a function of the geometric properties
of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section
classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition,
for slender sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress
reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again
a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically
determined by STAAD for use in the design process.

Axial Tension
In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the
tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the
member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as outlined
in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity
of a given member per this procedure, based on a user supplied net
section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be
altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1 ), proceeding
with member selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does
not have any slenderness limitations for tension members.

Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression
resistance of the member is greater than the axial compressive
load. Compression resistance is determined according to the
compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the

Section 2B

2-31
gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant
strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the
considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have
on column behaviour. Based on data collected from extensive
research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with
low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections
are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about
an axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are
incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves
together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use
for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section
is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in
Annex C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a
function of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut
Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the
member and appropriate design strength.

A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members
are no longer required to be checked for slenderness limitations,
however, this option can be included by specifying a MAIN
parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on
double angles checked as battened struts as per clause 4.7.9.

Axially Loaded Members With Moments
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment
capacity of the member must be calculated about both principal
axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section
is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the
basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The
purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working
load. For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is
used. For plastic or compact sections with high shear loads, the
plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads.
The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure
outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate
moment capacities of the section.
Section 2B

2-32
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction
formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective
tension capacity.

For members with axial compression and moment, two principal
interaction formulae must be satisfied Cross Section Capacity
check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check
(4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the member buckling
resistance check have been outlined in BS5950:2000 - the
simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach
(4.8.3.3.2) and Annex I1 for stocky members. As noted in the
code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis
moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more
conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found,
however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore
performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more
appropriate criteria can be used.

Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m
x
m
y
and m
yx
, can be
specified by the user or calculated by the program.

Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile
and compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate
method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD
also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for
compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is the case,
COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the
presence of moments.

Shear Load
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear
capacity of the section is greater than the shear load on the
member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the
procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if
appropriate, considering the appropriate shear area for the section
specified.

Section 2B

2-33
Lateral Torsional Buckling
Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used
in BS5950, members are likely to experience relatively large
deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling,
may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral
torsional buckling must be considered carefully.

The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in
section 4.3 has been incorporated in the STAAD implementation
of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member subjected to
moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on
the section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling
resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance
moment, the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been
implemented for all sections with the exception of angles. In
Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the
elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent
slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the
equivalent moment factor, m
LT
, which is determined as a function
of the loading configuration and the nature of the load
(stabilizing, destabilizing, etc).

R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions
Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I.
recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In
such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the
reduced plastic moduli:

Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A

Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A

Section 2B

2-34
Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with
BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along with their default values.
The following items should be noted with respect to their use.

1. (PY Steel Design Strength )
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform
design strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is
required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to
the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength
is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a
particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element
considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and
the program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate
value.
2. (UNL, LY and LZ - Relevant Effective Length)
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real
numbers greater than zero in current units of length. They are
supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ (which are
factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and
compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that
both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even
though they are often the same values. The former relates to
compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling
while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.

3. (TRACK - Control of Output Formats )
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0 or 2.0, member
capacities will be printed in design related output (code check
or member selection) in kilonewtons per square metre.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check,
usually with a different load list to the main code check. The
members that are to be checked must have the parameters,
DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 set.

Section 2B

2-35

An example of each TRACK setting follows:-

TRACK 0.0 OUTPUT STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI )
--------------------------- ******************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)

MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================================
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50
---------------------------------

--------------------------- ******************************


FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================================
1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50

CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4
MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9 MB= 1084.1 PV= 1597.5
BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000 n = 1.000
PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ= 1141.9 MRY= 120.4

Section 2B

2-36
TRACK 2.0 OUTPUT STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI )
--------------------------- ***************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
FX MY MZ LOCATION

===================================================================
1 ST UB533X210X92 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.902 100
0.00 0.00 585.41 0.00

===================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 275
Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 275 N/mm2

SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length = 325.00
Gross Area = 117.00 Net Area = 117.00

Major axis Minor axis
Moment of inertia : 55229.996 2389.000
Plastic modulus : 2360.000 356.000
Elastic modulus : 2072.031 228.285
Shear Area : 58.771 53.843

DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000
Section Class : PLASTIC

Major axis Minor axis
Moment Capacity : 649.0 94.2
Reduced Moment Capacity : 649.0 97.9
Shear Capacity : 969.7 888.4

BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)

LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 649.00, 0.001
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):

Section 2B

2-37
mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00
Mlt = 585.41 : Mx = 585.41 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00

CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):

CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.329 100 - 292.3 - - -
BS-4.3.6 0.902 100 - 292.3 - 585.4 -
BS-4.8.3.2 0.814 100 0.0 68.0 0.0 585.4 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 1.027 100 0.0 - - 585.4 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.902 100 0.0 - - 585.4 0.0
Annex I.1 0.902 100 0.0 - - 585.4 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
_________________________

4. (MX, MY, MYX and MLT Equivalent Moment Factors)
The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be
specified directly by the user as a positive value between 0.4
and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0 for MLT.

The program can be used to calculate the values for the
equivalent moment factors by defining the design member with
a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference Manual
section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by
Specification of GROUPS). The nodes along the beam can
then be defined as the location of restraint points with J
settings.

Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined
as having the upper flange restrained (positive local Y) with
the a U setting or the lower flange restrained (negative local
Y) with a L setting.

Section 2B

2-38
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single
continuous member as shown below:

To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a
group, called MainBeam:

START GROUP DEFINITION
MEMBER
_MainBeam 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION

Note that this can be done in the GUI by selecting the beams and
clicking on the menu option:

Tools | Create New Group

Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:-

Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33

Section 2B

2-39
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2

a. Consider MX, MY and MYX

Say that this member has been restrained in its major axis
(local Y) only at the ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has
been restrained at the ends and also at node number 33 (joint
3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained at
its ends. Hence:-

For the major axis, local Y axis:-
MX _MainBeam J1 J6

For the minor axis, local Z axis:-
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6

For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:-
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6

b. Consider MLT

Say that this member has been restrained at its ends against
lateral torsional buckling and the top flange has been
restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower
flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:-

MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6

To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L
y
at joint
14:-

MY _groupname J1 J4 J6

Section 2B

2-40
5. (LEG - Table 25 BS5950 for Fastener Control)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee
sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the
connection provided at the end of the member. To define the
appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned
to the member.

The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter
required to match the BS5950 connection definition:-

Clause LEG
short leg 1.0 (a) - 2 bolts
long leg 3.0
short leg 0.0
4.7.10.2
Single Angle

(b) - 1 bolt
long leg 2.0

long leg 7.0
short leg 2.0 (b) - 1 bolt
long leg 6.0
long leg 1.0 (c) - 2 bolts
short leg 5.0
long leg 0.0
4.7.10.3
Double Angle

(d) - 1 bolt
short leg 4.0

(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts 1.0 4.7.10.4
Channels (b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0

Tee Sections (b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0

For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the
geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The
effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:-

La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ

Section 2B

2-41
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to
calculate the compression strength p
c
for the weaker principal
axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to
c
for the stronger principal
axis.

Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not
known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG
parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal
axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.

For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply
with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from
user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an
eleventh value, r
vv
, should be supplied at the end of the ten
existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the
single angle making up the pair.

6. (SWAY Sway Loadcase)
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be
treated as a sway load case in the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4.
This load case would be set up to represent the k
amp
M
s

mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add
the forces from this load case to the forces of the other load
case it is designed for.

Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be
designed as a separate load case. The following is the correct
syntax for the parameter:-

SWAY

(load case number)

ALL
MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)

e.g.
SWAY 5 MEM 1 to 10
SWAY 6 _MainBeams
Section 2B

2-42

Table 2B.1 - British Steel Design BS5950:2000 - Parameters

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
CODE BS5950 Design Code to follow. See section 5.47.1 of the
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade S 275
1.0 = Grade S 355
2.0 = Grade S 460
3.0 = As per GB 1591 16 Mn
PY * Set according
to steel grade
(SGR)
Design strength of steel
KY 1.0 K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the minor
axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the major
axis.
LY * Member
Length
Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate
(KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio.
LZ * Member
Length
Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate
(KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio.
UNF 1.0 Factor applied to unsupported length for Lateral Torsional
Buckling effective length per section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
UNL * Member
Length
Unsupported Length for calculating Lateral Torsional
Buckling resistance moment section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
SBLT 0.0 Identify Section type for section classification
0.0 = Rolled Section
1.0 = Built up Section
2.0 = Cold formed section
MAIN 0.0 Slenderness limit for members with compression forces,
effective length/ radius of gyration, for a given axis:-
0.0 = Slenderness not performed.
1.0 = Main structural member (180)
2.0 = Secondary member. (250)
3.0 = Bracing etc (350)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress all member capacity info.
1.0 = Print all member capacities.
2.0 = Print detailed design sheet.

Section 2B

2-43

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
4.0 = Deflection Check (separate check to main select /
check code)
BEAM 3.0 0.0 = Design only for end moments or those locations
specified by the SECTION command.
1.0 = Calculate forces and moments at 12th points along
the member. Establish the location where Mz is the
maximum. Use the forces and moments at that
location. Clause checks at one location.
2.0 = Same as BEAM = 1.0 but additional checks are
carried out for each end.
3.0 = Calculate moments at 12th points along the
member. Clause checks at each location including
the ends of the member.
LEG 0.0 Valid range from 0 7 and 10. See section 2B.6.5 for
details. The values correspond to table 25 of BS5950 for
fastener conditions.
LVV * Maximum of
Lyy and Lzz
(Lyy is a term
used
by BS5950)
Used in conjunction with LEG for Lvv as per BS5950 table
25 for double angles, note 5.
CB 1.0 1.0 = BS5950 per clause B.2.5 (continuous) to calculate
Mb.
2.0 = To calculate Mbs (simple) as per Clause 4.7.7 as
opposed to Mb.
DFF None
(Mandatory
for deflection
check,
TRACK 4.0)
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection
DJ1 Start Joint
of member
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of
"Deflection Length" (See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of
member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
ESTIFF 0.0 Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2
0.0 = Fail ratio uses MIN of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and
Annex I1 checks.
1.0 = Fail ratio uses MAX of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and
Annex I1 checks.
Section 2B

2-44

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
WELD 1.0 closed
2.0 open
Weld Type, see AISC steel design
1.0 = Closed sections. Welding on one side only (except
for webs of wide flange and tee sections)
2.0 = Open sections. Welding on both sides (except
pipes and tubes)
TB 0.0 0.0 = Elastic stress analysis
1.0 = Plastic stress analysis
PNL * 0.0 Transverse stiffener spacing (a in Annex H1)
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the calculations.
SAME** 0.0 Controls the sections to try during a SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of the same type as original
1.0 = Try only those sections with a similar name as
original, e.g. if the original is an HEA 100, then only
HEA sections will be selected, even if there are
HEMs in the same table.
MX 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for major axis flexural buckling
as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4
MY 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for minor axis flexural buckling
as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4
MYX 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for minor axis lateral flexural
buckling as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4
MLT 1.0 Equivalent moment factor for lateral torsional buckling as
defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4
SWAY none Specifies a load case number to provide the sway loading
forces in clause 4.8.3.3.4 (See additional notes)
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual capacities.
* current units must be considered.
**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected
section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.

Section 2B

2-45
NOTES:

1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for
calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be
noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal
to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to
the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length"
for all three members will be equal to the total length of the
beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used
to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be
"1" and DJ2 should be "4".

D = Maximum local deflection for members
1, 2 and 3.
D
1
2 3
4
1
2 3

EXAMPLE : PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL

2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default
to the member length and local deflections will be measured
from original member line.

3) The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other
available parameters for steel design.
2B.7 Design Operations
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of
structural members as individual components of an analysed
structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the
ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These
facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the
requirements of the design problem.

Section 2B

2-46
The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the
default is all load cases.
Specify design parameter values, if different from the default
values.
Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection
along with the list of members.

These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times
depending upon the design requirements.
2B.8 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided
checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the forces
and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections
are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code
checking.

When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints
whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical
condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950 specifications
for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the
critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any
other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the
location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).

Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in
Section 2B.4 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual or any of
the user defined sections in section 5.19 with two exceptions;
GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will not be considered
for design along with PRISMATIC sections, which are also not
acceptable.

Section 2B

2-47
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified
members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can
select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which
fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The
section selected will be of the same type section as originally
designated for the member being designed. Member selection can
also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which
limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel
sections with the same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 -
CODE CHECKING.

Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a
user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table.

Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section
properties are input as prismatic or as above limitations for code
checking.
Section 2B

2-48
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the
results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are
explained as follows:

a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the
design is performed.

b) TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been
checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
c) RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or
FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will
be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the
member.

d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the BS5950 code
which governs the design.

e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to
allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean
the member has passed.

f) LOADING provides the load case number, which
governed the design.

g) FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-
axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does
consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX,
MY and MZ are printed since they are the
ones which are of interest, in most cases.

Section 2B

2-49
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start
of the member to the section where design
forces govern.

i) TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the
program will block out part of the table and
will print the allowable bending capacities
in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced
moment capacities (MRY & MRZ),
allowable axial capacity in compression
(PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity
(PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design
results as shown in section 2B.9.
2B.11 Plate Girders
Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950
Section 4.4) if d/t > 70 for rolled sections or d/t >62 for
welded sections. The parameter SBLT should be used to identify
sections as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for more
information.
If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set
with the PNL parameter. These are then used to check against the
code clauses 4.4.3.2 - Minimum web thickness for serviceability
and 4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to avoid compression
flange buckling. The following printout is then included if a
TRACK 2.0 output is selected:-
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118 N/mm2
d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS

The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using
clause 4.4.5.2 - Simplified method and the result is included in
the ratio checks.
Section 2B

2-50
2B.12 Composite Sections
Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a
concrete flange either from a standard database section using the
CM option, or from a modified user WIDE FLANGE database with
the additional composite parameters, cannot be designed with
BS5950:2000.

2-51


2B1.1 General
This code has been withdrawn by the British Standards, but has
been retained in STAAD.Pro for comparative purposes only.

The design philosophy embodied in BS5950 is built around the
concept of limit state design, used today in most modern steel
design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into
consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their
intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized -
serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate
limit state design are strength and stability while that in
serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors
are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.

In the STAAD implementation of BS5950, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit
states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This
procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of
allowable member depths, desired section type or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that
code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies
the governing criteria.

The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow
sections are built into the program for use in specifying member
properties as well as for the actual design process. See section
2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections.
In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels,
Section
2B1
Section 2B1

2-52
tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and
angles, there is a provision for user provided tables.
2B1.2 Analysis Methodology
analysis results.
2B1.3 Member Property Specifications
steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the
2B1.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete
may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.

Section 2B1

2-53
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections
available:

Universal Beams, Columns And Piles

All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are
available. The following examples illustrate the designation
scheme.

20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186

Rolled Steel Joists
Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with
the weight omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same
specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be
specified with an "A" at the end.

10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A

Channel Sections
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been
incorporated in STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the
joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be used
with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76

Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them,
are available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify
a double channel, e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc.
Section 2B1

2-54

51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)

Tee Sections
by referring to the universal beam shapes from which they are cut.
For example,

54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22 (tee cut from
UB254X102X22)

Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for input. Two types of
specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard
angle section is specified as follows:

15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis
corresponds to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. If the
local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables,
type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.

35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18

Double Angles
of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD will

Section 2B1

2-55
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle
sections.

To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP
section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for
diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.

10 15 TA ST PIP213.2 (specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2
mm wall thickness)


1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 (specifies a pipe with
outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length
units)

Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:

TUB 400 200 12.5

Tube symbol
Height (mm)
Thickness (mm)
Width (mm)
Section 2B1

2-56
Example: 15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0


6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 is a tube that has a height
of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units.

2B1.5 Member Capacities
The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic
moment of the section. This is a significant departure from the
standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting
condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a
given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the
basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to
the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this,
sections are classified as either plastic, compact, semi-compact or
slender, which governs the decision whether to use the plastic or
the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a
function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD is
capable of determining the section classification for both hot
rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections,
BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce
the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry
of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use
in the design process.

Axial Tension
member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as outlined

Section 2B1

2-57
in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity
of a given member per this procedure, based on a user supplied net
section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be
altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1 ), proceeding
with member selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does
not have any slenderness limitations for tension members.

Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression
resistance of the member is greater than the axial compressive
load. Compression resistance is determined according to the
compressive strength which is a function of the slenderness of the
gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant strut
characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the
considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have
on column behaviour. Based on data collected from extensive
research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with
low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections
are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about
an axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are
incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves
together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use
for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section
is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in
Appendix C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a
function of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut
Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the
member and appropriate design strength.

In addition to the compression resistance criteria, compression
members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a
function of the nature of the use of the member ( main load
resisting component, bracing member etc). In both the member
selection and the code checking process, STAAD immediately
does a slenderness check on appropriate members before
continuing with the other procedures for determining the adequacy
of a given member.

Section 2B1

2-58
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment
capacity of the member must be calculated about both axes and all
axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is plastic or
compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic
moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The purpose of
this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For
semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For
plastic or compact sections with high shear loads, the plastic
modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads. The
STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure
outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate
moment capacities of the section.

For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction
formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective
tension capacity.

For members with axial compression and moment, two principal
interaction formulae must be satisfied - local capacity check
(4.8.3.2) and overall buckling check (section 4.8.3.3 ). Two types
of approach for the overall buckling check have been outlined in
BS5950 - the simplified approach and the more exact approach. As
noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the
minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may
be more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been
found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD
therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that
the more appropriate criteria be used. Members subject to biaxial
moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial
forces are checked using the appropriate method described above
with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross
checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections
may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be
the critical condition reported despite the presence of moments.

Section 2B1

2-59
Shear Load
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear
capacity of the section is greater than the shear load on the
member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the
procedure outlined in section 4.2.3 and considering the appropriate
shear area for the section specified.

Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used
in BS5950, members are likely to experience relatively large
deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling,
may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral
torsional buckling must be considered carefully.

The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in
section 4.3 has been incorporated in the STAAD implementation
of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member subjected to
moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on
the section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling
resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance
moment, the procedure outlined in Appendix B.2 has been
implemented for all sections with the exception of angles. In
Appendix B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the
elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent
slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the
equivalent moment factor, m, and slenderness correction factor, n,
which are determined as a function of the loading configuration
and the nature of the load ( stabilizing, destabilizing, etc ).

The user is allowed to control these values through the parameters
CMM & CMN. If CMM is set to -1, the program automatically
calculates the coefficient 'm'. Similarly parameter CMN may be
used for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. BS5950 recommends the
use of tables 15 & 16 for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. The
parameter CMN may be set to -1 or -2 to instruct the program to
obtain coefficient 'n' from table 15 or 16 respectively. If a positive
value is provided for either CMN or CMM, the program will use
this value directly in calculations. The default value for each of
Section 2B1

2-60
these parameters is 1.0 as shown in table 2B.1 of this document. It
may be noted that BS5950 recommends the use of either 'm' or 'n'
in lateral torsional buckling calculations. If both 'm' and 'n' are set
to values less than 1 in error, the program will always reset CMN
to 1 and over-ride the provided value. The following table
illustrates the use of parameters 'm' and 'n'.

PARAMETER VALUE STAAD ACTION
CMM ANY POSITIVE Direct use of this value in
VALUE calculations.
-1 Program calculates 'm' per
BS5950
-2 Calculate m for both axes
CMN ANY POSITIVE Direct use of this value in
VALUE calculations.
-1 Program calculates 'n' per
BS5950 - Table 15
-2 Program calculates 'n' per
BS5950 - Table 16

IMPORTANT NOTE:

Note that if negative value options are chosen, lateral restraints
should be modelled by nodes and the section command
incorporated to find Mo. Failure to use the SECTION 0.5
command will cause the program to reset CMN to 1.0 and over-
ride any value that may have been provided. In requesting 'n' to be
calculated by the program by using a negative CMN value, the
member properties must be British ( or British combined with user
table sections). If other profiles such as European are being used
then 'n' values are reset conservatively to 1.0 by the program. In
the case of angles, section 4.3.8 of the code is followed.

R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions
Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I.
recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In
such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the
reduced plastic moduli:

Section 2B1

2-61
Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A

Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ]
for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A
2B1.6 Design Parameters
BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along with their default values.
The following items should be noted with respect to their use.

1. (PY - STEEL DESIGN STRENGTH )
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform
design strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is
required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to
the stipulations of BS5950 table 7 in which the design strength
is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a
particular steel grade and particular element considered.
Generally speaking this option is not required and the program
should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
2. (UNL, LY and LZ - relevant EFFECTIVE LENGTHS)
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real
numbers greater than zero in current units of length. They are
supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY KZ ( which are
factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and
compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that
both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even
though they are often the same values. The former relates to
compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling
while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.

3. (CMN and CMM - Lateral torsional buckling coefficients)
As per section 2B.7 of this manual CMM and CMN should not
both be used in a given design. In such a case the program will
reset CMN to 1.0
Section 2B1

2-62
4. (TRACK - control of output formats )
When the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 or 2.0, member
capacities will be printed in design related output ( code check
or member selection ) in kilonewtons per square metre. An
example of each follows.

--------------------------- ******************************


FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================================

1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50

---------------------------------

Section 2B1

2-63

--------------------------- ******************************


FX MY MZ LOCATION
=================================================================

1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50

CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4
MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9 MB= 1084.1 PV= 1597.5
BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000 n = 1.000
PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ= 1141.9 MRY= 120.4

--------------------------- ******************************


FX MY MZ LOCATION

=================================================================

1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50
=================================================================

MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = 43
Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm
2

Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm
2
Reduced = 232N/mm
2

SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length = 450.00
Gross Area = 216.60
Net Area = 216.60

z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia : 170147.000 6621.000
Plastic modulus : 5624.000 810.000
Elastic modulus : 4911.156 517.670
Shear Area : 109.122 100.470
Radius of gyration : 28.027 5.529
Effective Length : 450.000 450.000
Section 2B1

2-64

DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950/1990
Section Class : SLENDER
Squash Load : 5739.90
Axial force/Squash load : 0.015

z-axis y-axis
Slenderness ratio (KL/r) : 16.1 81.4
Compression Capacity : 5036.2 3451.5
Tension Capacity : 5739.9 5739.9
Moment Capacity : 1141.9 120.4
Reduced Moment Capacity : 1141.9 120.4
Shear Capacity : 1561.5 1597.5

BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment (MB = 1084.1)
co-efficients m & n : m =1.00 n =1.00, Effective Length =4.500


BS-4.7 (C) 0.025 3 86.7 3.2 0.0 -22.0 0.0
BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3 86.7 3.2 0.0 -22.0 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.047 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.026 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.005 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 0.0
BS-4.3 (LTB) 0.020 4 -86.7 3.2 0.0 22.0 0.0

Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design

5. ( LEG - table 24/28 BS5950 for fastner control )
The LEG parameter follows the requirements of BS5950 table
28. This table concerns the fastner restraint conditions for
angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for
slenderness. The following values are available:

Clause 4.7.10.2 (a) Single Angle, short leg 1.0
(b) Single Angle, short leg 0.0
(a) Single Angle, long leg 3.0
(b) Single Angle, long leg 2.0

Section 2B1

2-65
Clause 4.7.10.3 (a) Double angle, short leg 3.0
(b) Double angle, short leg 2.0
(c) Double angle, long leg 1.0
(d) Double angle, long leg 0.0
(a) Double angle, long leg 7.0
(b) Double angle, long leg 6.0
(c) Double angle, short leg 5.0
(d) Double angle, short leg 4.0
Clause 4.7.10.4 (a) Channels, 2 or more rows 1.0
(b) Channels, 1 row 0.0
Clause 4.7.10.5 (a) Tee sections, 2 or more rows 1.0
(b) Tee sections, 1 row 0.0

When defining member properties for single angles, the spec
(manual ref: 5.20.1) should be provided as RA and not ST. See fig
1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual.

Table 28 may be by-passed in favour of table 24 by using:

10 = Table 24 for equal angles or long legs of unequal
angles
11 = Table 24 for short legs of unequal angles

For single angles, LY and KY parameters should be provided
relative to the raa axis while LZ and KZ are related to rbb. Lvv
will be considered as the minimum of the KY*LY and KZ*LZ
values.

For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with
note 5 table 28. In addition, if using double angles from user
tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh
value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values
corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making
up the pair.

Section 2B1

2-66

Table 2B1.1 - British Steel Design BS5950:1990 - Parameters

Parameter
Name
KY 1.0 K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the minor
axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the major
axis.
LY * Member
Length
Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate
(KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio.
LZ * Member
Length
Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate
(KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio.
UNF 1.0 Factor applied to unsupported length for Lateral Torsional
Buckling effective length per section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
UNL * Member
Length
Unsupported Length for calculating Lateral Torsional
Buckling resistance moment section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950.
PY * Set according
to steel grade
(SGR)
Design Strength of steel
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade 43
1.0 = Grade 50
2.0 = Grade 55
3.0 = As per GB 1591 16 Mn
SBLT 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section
MAIN 1.0 As per BS5950 4.7.3
1.0 = Main structural member (180)
2.0 = Secondary member. (250)
3.0 = Bracing etc (350)
CMM ! 1.0 Coefficient m for lateral torsional buckling. (see section
2B.5)
CMN ! 1.0 Coefficient n for lateral torsional buckling. (see section
2B.5)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress all member capacity info.
1.0 = Print all member capacities.
2.0 = Print detailed design sheet.
4.0 = Deflection Check (separate check to main select /
check code)

Section 2B1

2-67

Parameter
Name
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0cm Minimum allowable depth
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual capacities.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = Design only for end moments or those locations
member and use the maximum Mz value for
design. Clause checks at one location
2.0 = Same as BEAM = 1.0 but additional checks are
carried out for each end.
member. Clause checks at each location including
the ends of the member.
CODE BS5950 Design Code to follow. See section 5.47.1 of the
LEG 0.0 Values range from 0 - 12. See section 2B.6.5 for details.
The values correspond to table 24/28 of BS5950 for
fastner conditions.
LVV * Maximum of
Lyy and Lzz
(Lyy is a term
used
by BS5950)
Used in conjunction with LEG for Lvv as per BS5950
table 28 for double angles, note 5.
CB 1.0 1.0 = BS5950 per clause B.2.5 (continuous) to calculate
Mb.
2.0 = To calculate Mbs (simple) as per Clause 4.7.7 as
opposed to Mb.
DFF None
(Mandatory for
deflection
check)
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection
DJ1 Start Joint
of member
DJ2 End Joint of
member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
ESTIFF 0.0 Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2
1.0 = Pass if member passes EITHER clause.
1.0 = Pass if member passes BOTH clauses.
Section 2B1

2-68

Parameter
Name
WELD 1.0 closed
2.0 open
Weld Type, see AISC steel design
1.0 = Welding on one side only (except for webs of wide
flange and tee sections)
2.0 = Welding on both sides (except pipes and tubes)
TB 0.0 2.0 = Elastic stress analysis
3.0 = Plastic stress analysis
PNL * 0.0 Transverse stiffener spacing (a in Appendix H1)
0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the calculations.
SAME ** 0.0 Controls the sections to try during a SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of the same type as original
1.0 = Try only those sections with a similar name as
original, e.g. if the original is an HEA 100, then
only HEA sections will be selected, even if there
are HEMs in the same table.
! CMN & CMM cannot both be provided.
* current units must be considered.
**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected
section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.

NOTE:

Section 2B1

2-69
1, 2 and 3.
D
1
2 3
4
1
2 3

DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL


2B1.7 Design Operations
structural members as individual components of an analysed
requirements of the design problem.

The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the load cases to be considered in the design.
values.
Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection
along with the list of members.

Section 2B1

2-70
2B1.8 Code Checking
checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the forces
and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections
are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code
checking.

whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical
condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950 specifications
for compression, tension , shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the
other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the
location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the
member where the critical condition occurs).

Section 2B.4 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual or any of
the user defined sections in section 5.19 with two exceptions ;
GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will not be considered
for design along with PRISMATIC sections which are also not
acceptable.
2B1.9 Member Selection
select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which
also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which

Section 2B1

2-71
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel
sections with the same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 -
CODE CHECKING.

Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a
user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table.

Member selection can not be performed on members whose section
properties are input as prismatic or as above limitations for code
checking.
2B1.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the

b) TABLE refers to steel section name which has been
checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
c) RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or
FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will
be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the
member.

d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the BS5950 code

e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to
allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean
the member has passed.

f) LOADING provides the load case number which
governed the design.
Section 2B1

2-72
g) FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-
axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does
consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX,
MY and MZ are printed since they are the
ones which are of interest, in most cases.

h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start
of the member to the section where design
forces govern.

i) TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the
program will block out part of the table and
will print the allowable bending capacities
in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced
moment capacities (MRY & MRZ),
allowable axial capacity in compression
(PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity
(PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design
results as shown in section 2B.9.
2B1.11 Plate Girders
Plate girders may be considered for design in BS5950. The "py"
used in the calculation of compressive strength is reduced by
20N/mm
2
as per the code if parameter SBLT is set to 1.0. The code
requires that for d/t >63E, the interaction checks be modified in
order to check for shear buckling of the web. This is considered in
STAAD ( versions 15.0 and over) following clause 4.4.4.2a and
4.4.4.3 of the code. The shear capacity is found from table 21 of
the code and used in clause 4.4.5.3. For plate girders, clauses
4.4.2.2a and 4.4.2.3a are also considered. In order to account for
these checks, the output has been modified to show these
variations from the more common critical checks. An example is
as follows, using TRACK 2.0, showing the bottom part of the
output having been modified as follows:

Section 2B1

2-73
BS5950 Table 7<note 2>: d/t > 63E Web Is Checked For Shear Buckling
d/t =101.7 qcr=191.9 N/mm2 d*t=14639 mm2 (4.4.5.3)Vcr= 2809.4 kN
Flange =COMPACT Pyf=344 N/mm2 4.4.2.2 a=PASS 4.4.2.3 a=PASS
Flange Ratio 4.4.4.2 (a) =0.20 L= 1 Web Ratio =0.05 L= 1


BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.177 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.049 1 0.0 150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.3 (LTB) 0.151 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.4.5.3 0.053 1 0.0 150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
BS-4.4.4.2 a 0.203 1 0.0 -150.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
2B1.12 Composite Sections
The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the
standard sections definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual. This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the
right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18
times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with
British sections two new options are available in user provided
tables.

1. WIDE FLANGE COMPOSITE:
Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE,
4 additional values can now be provided. The first is the width
of concrete to the left of centre of the steel web (b1). The
second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the
concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular
ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding
a '-' at the first position on the first line of data. The program
now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described above. If (-
) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2
breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.

Section 2B1

2-74
2. ISECTION:
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.

3. EXAMPLE INPUT:

UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1

The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES
under wide flange and are available on request to any existing
user. Please note however that composite design IS NOT available
in this portion of STAAD.

2-75

Design Per BS5400

2C.1 General Comments
BS5400 is an additional code available from Research Engineers.
It does not come as standard with British versions.

The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design
philosophy and is applicable to steel, concrete and composite
construction. The code is in 10 parts covering various aspects of
bridge design. The implementation of part 3, Code of practice for
design of steel bridges, in STAAD is restricted in its scope to
simply supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains
constant and both construction and composite stages of steel I-
Sections can be checked. The following sections describe in more
detail features of the design process currently available in STAAD.
2C.2 Shape Limitations
The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the
ratio of flange outstand to thickness is large. In order to prevent
this, the code sets limits to the ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the
event of exceeding these limits, the design process will terminate
with reference to the clause.
Section
2C
Design Per BS5400
Section 2C

2-76
2C.3 Section Class
Sections are further defined as compact or non-compact. In the
case of compact sections, the full plastic moment capacity can be
attained. In the case of non compact sections, local buckling of
elements may occur prior to reaching the full moment capacity and
for this reason the extreme fibre stresses are limited to first yield.
In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7 and
the checks that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
2C.4 Moment Capacity
Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained
elements in compression. The code deals with this effect by
limiting the compressive stress to a value depending on the
slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio Le/Ry.
Le is the effective length governed by the provision of lateral
restraints satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the
allowable compressive stress is determined then the moment
capacity appropriate to the section type can be calculated. STAAD
takes the effective length as that provided by the user, defaulting
to the length of the member during construction stage and as zero,
assuming full restraint throughout, for the composite stage. The
program then proceeds to calculate the allowable compressive
stress based on appendix G7 from which the moment capacity is
then determined.
2C.5 Shear Capacity
The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the
limiting shear strength, l, which is dependant on the slenderness
ratio. STAAD follows the iterative procedure of appendix G8 to
determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear
capacity is then calculated based on the formula given under
clause 9.9.2.2.

Section 2C

2-77
2C.6 Design Parameters
BS5400 are listed in table 2C.1. Depending on the value assigned
to the 'WET' parameter, the users can determine the stage under
consideration. For a composite design check, taking into
consideration the construction stage, two separate analyses are
required. In the first, member properties are non-composite and the
WET parameter is set to 1.0 . In the second, member properties
should be changed to composite and the WET parameter set to 2.0.
Member properties for composite or non-composite sections
should be specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19
of the manual for specification of user tables). Rolled sections,
composite or non-composite, come under WIDE FLANGE section-
type and built-up sections under ISECTION. When specifying
composite properties the first parameter is assigned a negative
value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the
concrete section. See user table examples provided.

Table 2C.1 - BS5400 Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
UNL* Member
Length
Unsupported Length for calculating allowable
compressive bending stress.
PY* Set according to Design Strength of steel SGR
SGR* 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade 43
1.0 = Grade 50
2.0 = Grade 55
SBLT 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section
MAIN 1.0 1.0 = Grade of concrete 30 N/mm
2
2.0 = Grade of concrete 40 N/mm
2

Design Per BS5400
Section 2C

2-78
Table 2C.1 - BS5400 Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
3.0 = Grade of concrete 50 N/mm
2

WET 0.0 0.0 = Wet stage with no data saved for composite
stage.
1.0 = Wet stage with data saved for composite
stage.
2.0 = Composite and wet stage combined.
3.0 = Composite stage only.
TRACK 1.0 1.0 = Print all member capacities.
0.0 = suppress all member capacities.
BEAM 0.0 MUST BE CHANGED TO 1.0 FOR ALL RUNS
LY* Member
Length
Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending
about Y-axis.
LZ* Member
Length
Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending
about Z-axis.
KY 1.0 K value for bending about Y-axis. Usually this is
minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for bending about Z-axis. Usually this is
major axis.
STIFF 1.0 Factor of length for panel length in the shear
calculation.
* Provided in current unit systems.

2C.7 Composite Sections
The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the
standard sections definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual. This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the
right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18
times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with
British sections two new options are available in user provided
tables.

Section 2C

2-79
1. WIDE FLANGE COMPOSITE:
Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE,
4 additional values can now be provided. The first is the width
of concrete to the left of centre of the steel web (b1). The
second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the
concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular
ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding
a '-' at the first position on the first line of data. The program
now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described above. If (-
) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2
breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.

2. ISECTION:
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.

3. EXAMPLE INPUT:

UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1

The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES
under wide flange and are available on request to any existing
user. Please note however that composite design IS NOT available
in this portion of STAAD.

Design Per BS5400
Section 2C

2-80

2-81

Design Per BS8007

2D.1 General Comments
BS8007 is an additional code available from Research Engineers.
It does not come as standard with British versions.

STAAD has the capability of performing concrete slab design
according to BS8007. BS8007 provides recommendations for the
design of reinforced concrete structures containing aqueous
liquids. It is recommended that the design of the structure is
carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the
recommendations given in BS8007.

Please use the following in conjunction with Section 2A of this
Manual - BS8110.
2D.2 Design Process
The design process is carried out in three stages.

1. Ultimate Limit States

The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried
out in accordance with recommendations given in BS8110. All
active design load cases are considered in turn and a tabulated
output is printed showing possible reinforcement arrangements.
12, 16 and 20 mm bars are considered with possible spacings from
100,125,150,175 and 200 mm. Within these spacings, the layout
providing the closest area of steel is printed under each bar size.
Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load
Section
2D
Steel Design Per BS8007
Section 2D

2-82
cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed.
Minimum reinforcement is in any case checked and provided in
each direction. WOOD & ARMER moments may also be included
in the design.
2. Serviceability Limit States

In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load
cases are calculated. The FIRST and EVERY OTHER OCCURING
design load case is considered as a serviceability load case and
crack widths are calculated based on bar sizes and spacings
proposed at the ultimate limit state check.

Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are
calculated directly under bars, midway between and at corners. A
tabulated output indicating critical serviceability load cases and
moments for top and bottom of the slab is then produced.

3. Thermal crack widths

Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through
available parameters, the user is able to provide information on the
type of slab, temperature range and crack width limits.

Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and
critical areas of reinforcements are calculated and printed in a
tabulated form.

Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing,
Smax and crack widths are calculated for the critical
reinforcements and printed under each bar size.

Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is
also printed under each bar size.

Section 2D

2-83
2D.3 Design Parameters
perform and control the design to BS8007.

These parameters not only act as a method to input required data
for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual
design process. Default values of commonly used values for
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table
2D.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their
default values.
2D.4 Structural Model
Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be
modelled using finite elements. The manual provides information
on the sign convention used in the program for defining elements,
(See main manual section 2-6).

It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the
positive local z axis points outwards away, from the centre of the
container. In this manner the "Top" of elements will consistently
fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will act in the
positive direction of the local z axis.

An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the
above procedure.

Element properties are based on the thickness given under
ELEMENT PROPERTIES command. The following example
demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm slab modelled with
10 elements.
Section 2D

2-84

UNIT MM
ELEMENT PROPERTIES
1 TO 10 THI 300.0
2D.5 Wood & Armer Moments
This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of
zero is used, the design will be based on the Mx and My moments
which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA
parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to
introduce WOOD & ARMER moments into the design replacing
the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the
Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section.
Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -
500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be
considered, an angle is given in degrees, measured between the
local element x axis anti-clockwise ( positive ). The resulting Mx*
and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.

Section 2D

2-85

Table 2D.1 - BS8007 Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
FYMAIN * * 460 N/mm
2
Yield for all reinforcing steel
FC * 30 N/mm
2
Concrete grade.
CLEAR * 20 mm Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the
bar. This is considered the same on both surfaces.
SRA 0.0 Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering
torsional moment Mxy - slabs on -500.
orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to
calculate WOOD &ARMER moments for design.
A* Skew angle considered in WOOD & ARMER
EQUATIONS. A* is any angle in degrees.
SCON 1 Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground
or suspended as defined in BS8007
1 = Suspended Slab
2 = Ground Slab
TEMP 30
C Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack

width calculations
CRACK * 0.2 mm Limiting thermal crack width
* Provided in current unit systems

Section 2D

2-86

Section 3
Canadian Codes

Aksf;ldkjasd

3-1

Concrete Design
Per CSA Standard A23.3-94

STAAD can perform design of concrete beams, columns and slabs
according to CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. Given the dimensions of
a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement
necessary to resist the various input loads.
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee)


For Slabs 4-noded Plate Elements
Section
3A
Concrete Design Per CSA Standard A23.3-94
Section 3A

3-2

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
11 14 PR YD 300.

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular
(450mm depth and 300mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 300mm diameter.
Considerations
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the
slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members.
The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in CSA
STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13. STAAD accounts for the
secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the
PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint
displacements of the structure, the program calculates the
additional moments induced in the structure due to the P-Delta
effect. Therefore, by performing a PDELTA ANALYSIS, member
forces are calculated which will require no user modification
before beginning member design.

The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account
for the slenderness effect is through user supplied moment
magnification factors (see the parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1).
Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a
factor by which moments will be multiplied before beginning
member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be
considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
It should be noted that STAAD does not factor loads automatically
for concrete design. All the proper factored loads must be provided
by the user before the ANALYSIS specification.

Section 3A

3-3
While performing a PDELTA ANALYSIS, all load cases must be
defined as primary load cases. If the effects of separate load cases
are to be combined, it should be done either by using the REPEAT
LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these
individual loading cases under one single load case. Usage of the
LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for
PDELTA ANALYSIS.
perform design per CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters
not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design
process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in
conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table
3A.1 contains a list of available parameters and their default
values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as
Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.

Table 3A.1 - Canadian Concrete Design -CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters

Parameter Default Description
Name Value
FYMAIN 400N/mm
2
FYSEC 400 N/mm
2
FC 30 N/mm
2
Specified compressive strength of concrete.
CLT 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of cross
section.
CLB 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of cross
section.
CLS 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the side of the
cross section.
MINMAIN Number 10 bar Minimum main reinforcement bar size
MINSEC Number 10 bar Minimum secondary (stirrup) reinforcement bar
size.
Section 3A

3-4
Table 3A.1 - Canadian Concrete Design -CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters

Name Value
MAXMAIN Number 55 bar Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start node of
beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.
EFACE 0 Face of Support Distance of face of support from end node of
beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.
(Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as
positive numbers).
TRACK 0.0 For TRACK = 0.0, Critical Moment will not be
printed out with beam design report. For
TRACK=1.0, moments will be printed.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design moments will
be magnified.
NSECTION 12 Number of equally-spaced sections to be
considered in finding critical moments for beam
design.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value defaults
to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This value defaults
to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
3A.6 Beam Design
forces, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and
shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of
sections considered is thirteen (start, end and 11 intermediate),
unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter.

Design for Flexure
Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 2 of CSA
Standard A23.3-94. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at
the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress
at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at
each of the thirteen sections. Each of these sections are designed
to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,

Section 3A

3-5
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the
section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section,
such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of
beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective
depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single
layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements
are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are
chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The
entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking
into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on
the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design.
Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts
have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of
reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-94. Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design
output (which finally will be more or less guided by the detailer
taking into account other practical considerations), the user has the
choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13
equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can
be prepared.

The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design.

1) LEVEL - Serial number of bar level which may
contain one or more bar group.

2) HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the bottom of
beam.

3) BAR INFOrmation - Reinforcement bar information
specifying number of bars and size.

4) FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to
the start of the rebar.

5) TO - Distance from the start of the beam to
the end of the rebar.

6) ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook
(STA,END) or continuation, is needed at start (STA)
or at the end (END) of the bar.
Section 3A

3-6
Design for Shear and Torsion
Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 4
of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist
both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at
the start and end sections. The location along the member span for
design is chosen as the effective depth + SFACE at the start, and
effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case which gives rise to
the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical
one. The calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will
be provided. The additional longitudinal steel area required for
torsion is reported.

The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no
torsion, and closed hoops for beams subjected to torsion.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.7 Column Design
Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the
CSA Standard A23.3-94. Columns are designed for axial force and
biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested to
calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum
reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for

Section 3A

3-7
square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and
square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally
distributed on each side. That means the total number of bars will
always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly
conservative results in some cases.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements.
The commands for specifying elements are in accordance with the
relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual.

Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same
principles as those for beams in flexure. The width of the beam is
assumed to be unity for this purpose. These moments are obtained
from the element force output (see the relevant sections of the
Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist
Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as
transverse reinforcement. The effective depth is calculated
assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC,
CLT and CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design.
Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not applicable to
slab design. The output consists only of area of steel required.
Section 3A

3-8
Actual bar arrangement is not calculated because an element most
likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.

LONG.
TRANS.
X
Y
Z
M
M
M
M
x
y
x
y


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLB 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Section 3B

3-9
Steel Design Per CSA Standard
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94

3B.1 General Comments
The Canadian Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the CSA
Standard CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, Limit States Design of Steel
Structures. A steel section library consisting of Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) shapes is available for member
property specification.

proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which
they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and
serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state
design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is
deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that
a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under
various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of
limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.

section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code
checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements
for each selected section are met and identifies the governing
criteria.
Section
3B
Steel Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16.1-94
Section 3B

3-10
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD
implementation of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94. A detailed description of
the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.
analysis results.
3B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

Section 3B

3-11
Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A
complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel
user interface.

Following is the description of the different types of sections
available:

Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes)
Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be
designated using the same scheme used by CSA. The following
example illustrates the specification of welded wide flange shapes.

100 TO 150 TA ST WW400X444
34 35 TA ST WW900X347

Wide Flanges (W shapes)
Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA
tables. For example,

10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106
100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101

S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other
I shaped sections like S, M and HP shapes are also available. The
designation scheme is identical to that listed in the CSA tables.
While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the
portion after the decimal point should be omitted. Thus,
M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8
should be specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating
specifications of these shapes are provided below.
Section 3B

3-12

10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79

Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)
C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following
example. As in S,M and HP sections, the portion after the decimal
point must be omitted in section designations. Thus, MC250X42.4
should be designated as MC250X42.

55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33

Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between
them, are specified by preceding the section designation by the
letter D. For example, a back to back double channel section
C200X28 without any spacing in between should be specified as:

100 TO 120 TA D C200X28

If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be
as follows:

100 TO 120 TA D C200X28 SP 2.5

Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used
for providing the spacing. The spacing should always be provided
in the current length unit.

Section 3B

3-13
Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L.
Thus, a 200X200 angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as
L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle
specifications.

75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20

Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this
specification, the local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical
Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the
CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes
the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles
in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation
facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by
substituting the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following
example for details.

10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4

The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is
shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual.

Double Angles
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be
substituted with LD (for long leg back to back) or SD (short leg
back to back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the
purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using the
word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit)
after section designation.

25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16
80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5

Section 3B

3-14
The second example above describes a double angle section
consisting of 125X75X6 angles with a spacing of 2.5 length units.

Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by
using the T specification instead of ST before the name of the W
shape. For example:

100 TO 120 TA T W200X42

will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section.

Rectangular Hollow Sections
These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those
sections listed in the CSA tables may be specified as follows.

55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4

Tube Symbol Thickness (in) X16
Width (in.) X10
TUB 80 X 60 X 4
Height (in) X 10

In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for
depth), WT(for width), and TH(for thickness) specifications.

Section 3B

3-15
For example:

100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5

will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall
thickness of 0.5 inches. Note that the values of depth, width and
thickness must be provided in current length unit.

Circular Hollow Sections
Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:


Pipe Symbol Thickness (mm)
Diameter (mm)
PIP 33 X 2.5
(Upto first decimal place only)
without decimal point

In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow
sections may be specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and
ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:


will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units
and inside diameter of 9.0 length units. Note that the values of
outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current
length unit.

Section 3B

3-16

Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES

Section 3B

3-17

* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH
3B.5 Section Classification
The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section
elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion.
Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2),
non compact (Class 3) or slender element (Class 4) sections
depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause
11.2 and Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94). This classification is a
function of the geometric properties of the section. The design
procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD
determines the section classification for the standard shapes and
user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall
into the category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections
are not designed by STAAD.
3B.6 Member Resistances
The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the
procedures outlined in section 13 of the specification. These
depend on several factors such as members unsupported lengths,
cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width
to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program automatically
takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in
STAAD for calculating the member resistances.

Section 3B

3-18
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on
two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is
intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The
second limit state involves fracture at the section with the
minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified
by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1).
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on
these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94.
Parameters FYLD, FU and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.

Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on
Clause 13.3 of the code. The equations presented in this section of
the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of
the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area
times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r
ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX,
KY, KZ, LX, LY and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of
the axial compression capacity calculations are :

1) For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss
members, the axial compression capacity in general column
flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the
slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The
parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
2) For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to
any bending or truss members, the axial compression capacity
in general column flexural buckling and local buckling of thin
legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC-LRFD code, 2
nd

ed., 1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian code doesnt
provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The
parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
3) The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking
flexural-torsional buckling into account. The rules of
Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 are used for

Section 3B

3-19
this purpose. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide
the effective length factor and effective length value for
flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling
capacity is computed for single channels, single angles, Tees
and Double angles.
4) The variable n in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF
shapes and 1.34 for all other shapes.
5) While computing the general column flexural buckling
capacity of sections with axial compression + bending, the
special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are
applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for
13.8.1(b), etc.)

Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the
purpose of computing the factored moment resistance is specified
in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is less
than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance
between the joints of the member), the member is treated as being
continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment
resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is
greater than or equal to one tenth the member length, its value is
used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations of Clause
13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of
laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending
capacity calculations are :

1) The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single
angles is calculated as

For Class 1 & 2 sections, Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections, Phi*Sy*Fy

where Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel

Section 3B

3-20
2) For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the
principal axes. The specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of
AISC-LRFD 1994, 2
nd
ed., are used for this purpose because
the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for
calculating this value.
3) For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of
singly symmetric shapes such as Tees and Double angles,
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31,
that a rational method, such as that given in SSRCs Guide to
Stability Design Criteria of Metal Structures, be used. Instead,
STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD
1994, 2
nd
ed.

Axial compression and bending
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression
and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of
interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending
caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using
amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side
of these equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is
considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.

Axial tension and bending
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed
using interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to
perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the
value of the left hand side of the critical equation.

Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the
equations of Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the
ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both
local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is

Section 3B

3-21
considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that
the slenderness ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See
Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16.1-94). Checks for safety
in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable
limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of
2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allows
specific needs.

the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter
values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.

Table 3B.1 - Canadian Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
KT 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling.
KY 1.0 K value for general column flexural buckling
slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general column flexural buckling
slenderness ratio.
LT Member Length Length for flexural torsional buckling.
LY Member Length Length for general column flexural buckling about
the local Y-axis. Used to calculate slenderness
ratio.
LZ Member Length Length for general column flexural buckling about
the local Z-axis. Used to calculate slenderness
ratio.
Section 3B

3-22

Name Value
FU 345.0 MPa Ultimate strength of steel.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of
the top flange for calculating moment resistance.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of
the bottom flange for calculating moment
resistance.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check slenderness ratio against the limits.
1.1 = Suppress the slenderness ratio check.
2.0 = Check slenderness ratio only for column
buckling, not for web (See Section 3B.6, Shear)
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5 : Value of
Omega_2 (Cl.13.6) to be used for calculation.
Equal to 0.0 : Calculate Omega_2
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Frame subjected to sidesway about local Y
axis.
1.0 = Frame not subjected to sidesway about
local Y axis.
Used in calculating Omega_2, Cl.13.6 of code
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = Frame subjected to sidesway about local Z
axis.
1.0 = Frame not subjected to sidesway about
local Z axis.
Used in calculating Omega_2, Cl.13.6 of code
CMY 1.0 1.0 = Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
CMZ 1.0 1.0 = Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only minimum design results.
1.0 = Report design strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full details of design.

Section 3B

3-23

Name Value
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required depth (Applicable for member
selection)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the
design strength.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and those at
locations specified by SECTION
command.
1.0 = Perform design for moments at twelfth
points along the beam.
DFF None(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
Deflection Length/Maxm. Allowable local
deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of
member
Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of
deflection length
DJ2 End Joint of
member
deflection length
3B.8 Code Checking
checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 requirements.

Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified
sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is
set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the
beam. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is
set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end
forces only. The code checking output labels the members as
PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing
load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes
of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent
Section 3B

3-24
of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK
parameter.

Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES,
PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.

Section 3B

3-25
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a
tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of
the CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 specification which governed the design.

If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances
will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the items
printed out.

CR = Factored compressive resistance
TR = Factored tensile resistance
VR = Factored shear resistance
MRZ = Factored moment resistance (about z-axis)
MRY = Factored moment resistance (about y-axis)

Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0.
Section 3B

3-26

3-27
Design Per Canadian Cold Formed
Steel Code

3C.1 General
Provisions of CSA S136-94, including revisions dated May, 1995,
have been implemented. The program allows design of single
(non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending,
shear, as well as their combinations. For laterally supported
members in bending, the Initiation of Yielding method has been
used. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been
included as an option.
3C.2 Cross-Sectional Properties
The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting
one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section
Property Tables published in the "Cold-Formed Steel Design
Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition.

The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:

Channel with Lips
Channel without Lips
Angle with Lips
Angle without Lips
Z with Lips
Z without Lips
Hat
Section
3C
Design Per Canadian Cold Fomed Steel Code
Section 3C

3-28
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of
the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section
designation symbol in the input file. Details of the latter are
available in Section AD.2002.4.1.1 of this document.

The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties.
STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure
analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are
used in the design stage, as applicable.
3C.3 Design Procedure
The following two design modes are available:

1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied
load effects, in accordance with CSA 136. Code checking is
carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a
form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to
resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the
degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK
parameter.

2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel
shapes database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members
that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In
addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the
member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all
database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel,
angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth
restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the
program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it
passes the code check or not.

Section 3C

3-29
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance
with Clauses 5.6.2.1 through 3 and 5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-
sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are
checked for compliance with
Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for
members in Compression
Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in
Compression
Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths.

The program will check member strength in accordance with
Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:

a. Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used,
as applicable.

b. Members in tension
Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.3.1 and
6.3.2.

c. Members in bending and shear

Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:

a. 6.4.1 General,
b. 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive
limit stress based on Initiation of Yielding,
c. 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
d. 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened
Flanges - additional limitations,
e. 6.4.5 Shear in Webs,
f. 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.

Section 3C

3-30
a. Members in compression


a. 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General,
b. 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling,
c. 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections,
d. 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections,
e. 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.

b. Members in compression and bending

Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and
Doubly Symmetric Sections. Input for the coefficients of uniform
bending must be provided by the user.

The following table contains the input parameters for specifying
values of design variables and selection of design options.

COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Parameter
Name
BEAM 1.0
When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the
adequacy of the member is determined by checking a
total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of
the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location
check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done
only at the locations specified by the SECTION
command (See STAAD manual for details). If neither
the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION command is
specified, STAAD will terminate the run and ask the
user to provide one of those 2 commands. This rule is
not enforced for TRUSS members.

Section 3C

3-31
Parameter
Name
CMZ 1.0
Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending z. See CSA
136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined axial load and bending
design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CMY 0.0
Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending y. See CSA
136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined axial load and bending
design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CWY 0
Specifies whether the cold work of forming
strengthening effect should be included in resistance
computation. See CSA 136, 5.2.
Values: 0 effect should not be included
1 effect should be included
DMAX
1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the section during
member selection. This value must be provided in the
current units.
DMIN
0.0 Minimum depth required for the section during member
selection. This value must be provided in the current
units.
FLX
1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is
provided or is not necessary for the member. See CSA
136, 6.6.2
Values:
0 Section subject to torsional flexural buckling and
restraint not provided
1 restraint provided or unnecessary
FU
450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units.
FYLD
350 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units.
Section 3C

3-32
Parameter
Name
KT
1.0 Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the
capacity in axial compression.
KY
1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling about
the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values
can range from 0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from buckling) to any user specified large
value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for
determining the capacity in axial compression.
KZ
1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling in the
local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented
from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is
used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the
capacity in axial compression.
LT
Member
length
Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current
units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to
any user specified large value. It is used to compute the
KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in
axial compression.
LY
Member
length
Effective length for overall column buckling in the local
Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values

Section 3C

3-33
Parameter
Name
LZ
Member
length
Effective length for overall column buckling in the local
Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values
NSF
1.0 Net section factor for tension members, See CSA 136,
6.3.1.
STIFF
Member
length
Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear stiffeners
for stiffened flat webs. It is input in the current units of
length. See section CSA 136, 6.4.5
TRACK
0
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in
which the design output is reported in the output file.
The allowable values are:

0 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio,
and PASS/FAIL status.
1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed
by TRACK 1
2 - Prints member and material properties in addition to
that printed by TRACK 2.
TSA
1 Specifies whether bearing and intermediate transverse
stiffeners satisfy the requirements of CSA 136, 6.5. If
true, the program uses the more liberal set of
interaction equations in 6.4.6.
Values:
0 stiffeners do not comply with 6.5
1 stiffeners comply with 6.5

Section 3C

3-34

Section 4
Chinese Codes

Kjahds;akh

4-1

Concrete Design Per GBJ 10-89

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design. It will
calculate the reinforcement needed for any concrete section. All
the concrete design calculations are based on limit state method of
GBJ 10-89.
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), and L-shapes

input:
Section
4A
Section 4A

4-2

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.

will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of
members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set
numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm
flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange
depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether
the section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or
column design
perform design as per GBJ 10-89. Default parameter values have
been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to
suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 of this
manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and
their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force
units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete
design. Please note as per GBJ 10-89 STAAD supports
Characteristic Values of Concrete Strength and Design Value of
Strength of Steel Bar only as per Table 2.1.3 and Table 2.2.3-1
respectively.
4A.5 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the
effect the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all

Section 4A

4-3
these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify
the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total
number of sections considered is 13( e.g. 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5,
.6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to
determine the design force envelopes.

Design for Flexure
resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where
ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced
section, doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the
flanged section are designed only as singly reinforced section
under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections
are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging
moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging
moment. Flexural design of beams are performed in two passes. In
the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with
the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide
after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural
guideline for the reinforcement detailing as per GBJ 10-89
Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in
the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the
detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user
has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at
11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can
be prepared.
Section 4A

4-4
Design for Shear
torsional moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally
spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst
the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear
capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement
provided by STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to
take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections.

Beam Design Output
The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear
reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.)
sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a
more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units.
An example of rectangular beam design output with the default
output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:

Section 4A

4-5

============================================================================
B E A M N O. 12 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe415 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 4000.0 mm SIZE: 250.0 mm X 350.0 mm COVER: 30.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION |FLEXTURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 29.64 1.23 4
| 0.00 -25.68 1.23 4 |
400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 27.97 1.23 4
| 0.00 -16.05 1.23 4 |
800.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 25.12 1.23 4
| 0.00 -7.17 1.23 4 |
1200.0 | 0.00 0.97 0.49 5 | 21.11 1.23 4
| 0.00 -0.14 1.32 6 |
1600.0 | 0.00 6.77 1.23 4 | 15.93 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2000.0 | 0.00 11.06 1.23 4 | 9.59 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2400.0 | 0.00 13.04 1.23 4 | 2.08 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2800.0 | 0.00 12.45 1.23 4 | -5.43 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3200.0 | 0.00 9.55 1.23 4 | -11.77 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3600.0 | 0.00 4.73 1.23 4 | -16.95 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.48 1.23 4
| 0.00 -17.36 1.23 4 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION 0.0 mm 1000.0 mm 2000.0 mm 3000.0 mm 4000.0 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 259.04 161.29 0.00 0.00 176.31
REINF. (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm)
BOTTOM 0.00 160.78 160.78 160.78 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF PROVIDED REINF. AREA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 4-10 3-10 2-10 2-10 3-10
REINF. 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s)
BOTTOM 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12
SHEAR 2 legged 8 2 legged 8 2 legged 8 2 legged 8 2 legged 8
REINF. @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
============================================================================
Section 4A

4-6
4A.6 Column Design
The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the
circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for
the sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement
distributed equally in two faces for sections under uniaxial
moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table
9A.1). Depending upon the member lengths, section dimensions
and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD
automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of the column
design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by GBJ 10-89 have been taken care of
in the column design of STAAD.

Column Design Output
Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the
reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section.
With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate
results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients,
additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced
to obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design
output is given in SI units. An example of a long column design
output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.

Section 4A

4-7

============================================================================
C O L U M N No. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 250.0 mm dia. COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 BRACED LONG COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : 62.0
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 2.21 32.29
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 1.24 1.24
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 12.00 12.00
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : 1.12 1.12
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : 1.00 1.00
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : 1.12 1.12
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 3.32 33.40
REQD. STEEL AREA : 1822.71 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 17 - 12 dia. (3.92%, 1922.65 Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 992.70 Muz1 : 36.87 Muy1 : 36.87
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 38.6, IS456)
============================================================================
Section 4A

4-8

Table 4A.1 Chinese Concrete Design GBJ 10-89 Parameters
Name Value
FYMAIN 210 N/mm
2
FYSEC 210 N/mm
2
FC 15 N/mm
2
CLEAR 25 mm
40 mm
For beam members.
For column members
BRACING 0.0 BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial force will
be taken into account for beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the column is unbraced
about major axis.
about minor axis.
about both axis.
RFACE 4.0 A value of 4.0 means longitudinal reinforcement
in column is arranged equally along 4 faces.
A value of 2.0 invokes 2 faced distribution about
major axis.
minor axis.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value defaults
PROPERTIES.

Section 4A

4-9
Table 4A.1 Chinese Concrete Design GBJ 10-89 Parameters
Name Value
PROPERTIES.
reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE and
END.
COLUMN DESIGN:
printed.
With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction analysis
results are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
With TRACK = 2.0, a schematic interaction
diagram and intermediate interaction values are
printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output.
reinforcement.
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of
column about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of
column about minor axis.

Section 4A

4-10

4-11

Steel Design Per GBJ 17- 88

4B.1 General
implementation in STAAD of the National Standard of the
Peoples Republic of China specifications for Design of Steel
Structures (GBJ 17-88). The design philosophy and procedural
logistics are based on the principles of limit state design method.
Facilities are available for member selection as well as code
checking. The following sections describe the salient features of
the design approach.

Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceedance of the capacities. The most economical section is
selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code
checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. It is generally assumed that
the user will take care of the detailing requirements like flange
buckling, web crippling etc. Users are recommended to adopt the
following steps in performing the steel design:

1) Specify the geometry and factored loads. Perform the analysis.
2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the
default values.
3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member
selection.
Section
4B
Steel Design Per GBJ 17-88
Section 4B

4-12
Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading
conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete
flexibility in providing loading specifications and using
analysis, P-Delta analysis or Non-linear analysis may be specified.
Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined
with static analysis results. Please note that STAAD does not
automatically factor any loads. The responsibility of creating load
combinations with factored loads is entirely upon the user.
to the STAAD Program Technical Reference manual.
4B.4 Built-in Chinese Steel Section Library
for these members. An example of the member property
specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section.

Section 4B

4-13
user interface.


B Shapes

20 TO 30 TA ST I14
33 36 TO 46 TA ST I63C

Channels
Channels are specified in the following way.

11 TA ST CH5
17 TA ST CH40C

Double Channels

11 TA D CH22B
17 TA D CH40C SP 0.5

channel CH22B with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a
double channel CH40C with a spacing of 0.5 length units between
the channels.

Section 4B

4-14
Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The

16 20 TA ST L25X16X3

16mm and a leg thickness of 3 mm. This specification may be used
when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.

17 21 TA RA L100X80X6

Double Angles

33 35 TA SD L25X16X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L100X80X6
43 TO 47 TA LD L32X20X3 SP 0.75

Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the
designation for the tube is as shown below. This method is meant
for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In
these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size
tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch
size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10
times the width, and 16 times the thickness.

Section 4B

4-15

1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0

In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For
example,


is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length
units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking,
no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this latter manner.

Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the
designation for the pipe is as shown below. This method is meant
for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.

1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5

In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying
the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the
section. For example,


specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside
diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member
selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter
manner.
Section 4B

4-16

Sample File Containing Chinese Shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 110 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 11
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CHINESE
* B SHAPES
1 TA ST I10
* CHANNELS
2 TA ST CH16A
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
3 TA D CH22B SP 1.0
* ANGLES
4 TA ST L25X25X4
* REVERSE ANGLES
5 TA RA L25X16X3
6 TA SD L25X16X3 SP 0.6
7 TA LD L32X20X3 SP 0.75
8 TA ST TUB50252.5
10 TA ST PIP180X5
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI

Section 4B

4-17
The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses
on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as
allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These
depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties,
slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so
on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for
calculating such capacities.

Allowable stress for Axial Tension
member is calculated on the basis of allowable tensile stresses
provided in Table 3.2.1-2 of the code. STAAD calculates the
tension capacity of a given member per this allowable stress value
and a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0
is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see
Table 1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking.

Allowable stress for Axial Compression
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined
according to Table 3.2.1-2. Compressive resistance is a function of
the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may
control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as
KY, LY, KZ and LZ. The provisions of Section 5 are used to check
the adequacy of sections in compression.

Allowable stress for Bending and Shear
Sections subjected to bending moments and shear forces are to be
designed according to the provisions of section 5. The permissible
bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such
factors as outstanding legs and thickness of flanges, unsupported
length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member
length) etc. Shear capacities are calculated according to Table
3.2.1-2 and Section 5 and are a function of web depth, web
Section 4B

4-18
thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK
parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.
4B.6 Combined Loading
For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending
and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different
locations of the member for all modeled loading situations. The
procedure of Section 5 is implemented for combined axial load and
bending.
The user is allowed complete control over the design process
through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 1 of this chapter.
These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer
to the program.

the particular design requirements of an analysis, some or all of
these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model
the physical structure.
4B.8 Code Checking
checked per the GBJ 17-88 requirements.

beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used.
When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to
zero (default), design will be based on member start and end

Section 4B

4-19
forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed
or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case,
location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.
the user table.

Table 4B.1 Chinese Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the
minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the
major axis.
LY Member
Length
Length in local y-axis to calculate slenderness
ratio.
LZ Member
Length
Same as above except in z-axis (major).
GRADE 1.0 Grade of steel as explained in Table 3.2.1-2 of
Code. The following values represent the
various grades of steel:
Grade 3 group 1 - 1
Grade 3 group 2 - 2
Grade 3 group 3 - 3
16Mn and 16Mnq - 4
15MnV and 15MnVq - 5
COMPRESSION 150 Allowable KL/r value in compression.
Section 4B

4-20
Table 4B.1 Chinese Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
TENSION 300 Allowable KL/r value in tension.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check Slenderness ratio against
allowable values.
1.0 = Do not check for slenderness.
PFY 1.2 Plasticity adaptation factor for Y direction.
PFZ 1.05 Plasticity adaptation factor for Z direction.
SFY 1.0 Stability factor for Y direction.
SFZ 1.0 Stability factor for Z direction.
TRACK 1.0 1.0 = Print all critical member stresses.
0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses.
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable
stresses.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and those
at locations specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth points
along the beam, and use the maximum,
Mz for design.

Sample Input data for Steel Design

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE CHINESE
NSF 0.85 ALL
GRADE 3.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

Section 5
European Codes

5-1

Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2

STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the
design of concrete structures. In general, all the available codes,
including EC2, follow the same procedure for the design of the
concrete members.

The main steps in performing a design operation are:

1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the
design process.
2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the
default values.
3. Perform the design for the member as appropriate.

These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times
depending on the design requirements. The parameters referred to
above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design
properties to individual members considered in the design
operation.
5A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)
Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules
and rules for buildings, provides design rules applicable to plain,
reinforced or prestressed concrete used in buildings and civil
engineering works. It is based on the limit state philosophy
common to modern standards.
Section
5A
Section 5A

5-2
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility
of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through
application of factors to both the applied loads and the material
properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method
of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and
moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for analysis,
allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be
considered.
5A.3 National Application Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared
National Application Documents to be used with EC2. These
documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also
provide supplements to the rules in EC2.

The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the
factors and rules provided in EC2 and has not been modified by
any National Application Documents.
5A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors
Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield
strengths, as given in table 2.3 of EC2, by the material partial
safety factors
c
for concrete and
s
for reinforcements. The
magnitude in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for
reinforcements.

Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values
unless replaced by user's numerical values provided in the input
file.

Modulus of Elasticity E = 21.71 KN/mm
2

Shear Modulus G = E / 2 (1 + v)
Poisson's Ratio v = 0.25
Unit weight = 23.56 KN/m
3

Section 5A

5-3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on
F
, the partial
safety factor for the action under consideration. In STAAD the
user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the
factors and their use in various load combinations.
5A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible
moments at the ends of the member. If a particular load case
causes tension in the column being designed that load case is
ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that
affect.

All active load cases will be considered in the design and
reinforcements are assumed symmetrically arranged in the cross
section.

The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases
have been considered is then reported as the critical required area
of reinforcement.

Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the
program will make due allowance for the additional moment that
has to be considered in the design.

Please note that sway type structures are not directly covered in
the current implementation of EC2. This effect, however, can be
catered for by the P-DELTA analysis option.

5A.6 Beams
actions active load cases are scanned to create appropriate
envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is
also identified and incorporated in the design.

Section 5A

5-4
Design for flexure
Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is
calculated on the basis of the section properties provided by the
user. If the required reinforcement exceeds the maximum
allowable then the section size is inadequate and a massage to that
effect is given in the output. Parabolic-rectangular stress
distribution for the concrete section is adopted and as moment
redistribution is not available in STAAD analysis, the limit for
N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2 (5) of the
code.

If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to
satisfy the above limits. It is important to know that beams are
designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is not
considered in the design at all.

Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method
mentioned in clause 4.3.2.4.3 where it is assumed the notional
strut inclination is constant. Depending on the shear distribution
within the member it may be possible that nominal shear
reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the design shear
forces. If this is not the case an attempt is made to identify regions
where nominal reinforcement is insufficient and appropriate
reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess design shear
force.
The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the
concrete is also checked and if exceeded, a message to revise the
section size is given in the output file.

Design for Torsion
Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements
need to be designed for at the ultimate limit state. Reinforcement
for torsional moments consists of stirrups combined with
longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of shear stress arising
from shear forces and torsional moments are checked in order to
establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is
inadequate a massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full

Section 5A

5-5
design is carried out and both shear links and longitudinal bars
required are calculated and, where necessary, links are combined
with the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in the
output file.
5A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to
represent them in the model of the structure. In the main the
design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that shear
forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear
reinforcements. In cases where this may not be the case users must
ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the
slab design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides
with the local x direction of the element, and, transverse
reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction of the
element. Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT'
reinforcement which relates to the element's 'TOP' and 'BOTTOM'
as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not
coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, users
must ensure this through the numbering scheme of the elements
(see figure 1.13 in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual). The
design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both
directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the
slab exterior faces.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the
program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be
altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model
being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the
parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and
when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active
"unit" specification. Table 5A.1 lists all the relevant EC2
parameters together with description and default values.
Section 5A

5-6
5A.9 Parameter Definition Table
Table 5A.1 Concrete Design Parameters-EC2
Name Value
FYMAIN *460 N/mm
2
Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs,
it is for reinforcement in both directions)
FYSEC *460N/mm
2
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement.
Applicable to shear bars in beams
FC * 30N/mm
2
Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size
Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32
40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to
shear reinforcement in beams
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement measured from
concrete surface to closest bar perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size
Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.
(Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending )
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end of beam.
(NOTE : Both SFACE & EFACE must be
positive numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with
beam design report. Column design
gives no detailed results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and
spacing. For columns gives a detailed
table of output with additional moments
calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0
List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at
each section of member
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design moments are
magnified

Section 5A

5-7
Table 5A.1 Concrete Design Parameters-EC2
Name Value
considered in finding critical moment for beam
design. The upper limit is 20.
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value default
is as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value default
is as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction
only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y
direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z
directions
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction
for column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z direction
for column design.
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with
Mxy used to calculate WOOD &
ARMER moments for design.
A = Skew angle considered in WOOD &
ARMER equations where A is the
angle in degrees.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams
as if they were continuous.
as if they were simply supported.
as if they were cantilever beams.
* Provided in current unit system

Section 5A

5-8

5-9

Steel Design Per Eurocode EC3

5B.1 General Description
Introduction

STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the
design of steel structures. In general, all the available codes,
including EC3, follow the same procedure to perform either code-
check of members or select optimum cross sections for members
of an analyzed structure.

The main steps in performing a design operation are:

1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be
considered in the design process.

2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different
from the default values.

3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or
member selection.

These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times
depending on the design requirements.

The parameters, referred to above, provide the user with the
ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members
considered in the design operation.

Section
5B
Section 5B

5-10
Eurocode (EC3)
Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and
rules for buildings (EC3) provides design rules applicable to
structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is
based on the limit states philosophy common to modern standards.
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility
of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through
application of factors to both the applied loads and the material
properties.

The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis
to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments.
STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be used in
all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3.
These are Simple, Continuous, and Semi-continuous which
reflect the ability of the joints in developing moments. In STAAD,
only Simple and Continuous joint types can be assumed when
carrying out global analysis.

Axes convention in STAAD and EC3
By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as
zz and the minor axis as yy. A special case where zz is the minor
axis and yy is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP
command is used and is discussed in the Technical Reference
Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and
joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same
positive direction.

EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse
to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same
way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right
hand rule. See figure below.

Users must bear this difference in mind when examining the code-
check output from STAAD.

Section 5B

5-11

STAAD EC3

Figure 1 Axes Convention in STAAD and EC3.

National Application Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared
National Application Documents to be used with EC3. These
documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also
provide supplements to the rules in EC3.

The current version of EC3 implemented in STAAD adheres to the
factors and rules provided in EC3 and has not been modified by
any National Application Documents.

Section Classification
The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a
cross-section prevents the development of full section capacity. It
is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to
determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in
accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern
on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the
design process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates
the capacities accordingly.

Material Properties and Load Factors
Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield
strength, as given in table 3.1, by the material partial safety factor
g
m
. The magnitude of g
m
in STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to
all section types.
Section 5B

5-12
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values
unless replaced by users numerical values provided in the input
file.

Modulus of Elasticity E = 205 N/mm
2

Shear Modulus G = E / 2 (1+v)
Poissons Ratio v = 0.3
Unit weight r = 76.8 KN/m
3

The magnitude of design loads is dependent on g
f
, the partial
safety factor for the action under consideration. In STAAD, the
user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the
factors and their use in various load combinations.

Axially Loaded Members
For members subject to tension loads only, tension capacity is
calculated based on yield strength, material factor g
m
and cross-
sectional area of the member with possible reduction due to bolt
holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in the capacity
calculations, the value used for g
m
is 1.2 and the yield strength is
replaced with the ultimate tensile strength of the material. The
tension capacity is then taken as the smaller of the full section
capacity and the reduced one.

For members subject to compression only, cross-section resistance
as well as buckling resistance must be checked. The latter is often
more critical as it is influenced by a number of factors including
the section type and member unbraced length.

Beams
The main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient cross-
section resistance to the applied bending moment and shear force.
Also the possibility of lateral-torsional buckling must be taken
into consideration when the full length of the member is not
laterally restrained.

The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type
and the material yield strength. There are four classes of cross-

Section 5B

5-13
sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain
full plastic capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections
cannot sustain sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of
the model.

Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic
moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to the extreme
compression fiber of the section. The elastic section modulus is
used to determine the moment capacity.

Class 4 sections do suffer from local buckling and explicit
allowance must be made for the reduction in section properties
before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of
interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment
resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however,
does not occur unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds
50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In such cases the
web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as
contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.

The plastic shear capacity is calculated using the appropriate shear
area for the section and the yield strength in shear, taken as
3
f
y
.

As mentioned earlier, lateral-torsional buckling must also be
considered whenever the full length of the member is not laterally
restrained. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type
as well as the unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of
applied loading.

The bending resistance of members subject to coexistent axial load
is reduced by the presence of the axial load. The presence of large
shear, as mentioned above, can also reduce the bending resistance
of the section under consideration.

If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending
resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into
Section 5B

5-14
account before calculating the effect of the axial load on the
bending resistance of the section.

Generally, EC3 requires to check cross-section resistance for local
capacity and also check the overall buckling capacity of the
member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and
bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the
tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the
extreme compression fiber stress and calculating an effective
applied moment for the section. This is then checked against the
lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section.
Introduction

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the
program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be
altered to suite the particular structure.

Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to
change some or all of the parameter default values. Some
parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting
must be compatible with the active unit specification.
Table 5B.1 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with
description and default values.

Section 5B

5-15
Parameter Definition Table
Table 5B.1 Steel Design Parameters EC3
Parameter Default Definition
Name
Value
KY 1.0
K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0
K factor in local z axis.
LY Member Length
Compression length in local y axis,
Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Length
Compression length in local z axis,
Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
UNL Member Length
Unrestraint length of member used in
calculating the lateral-torsional resistance
moment of the member.
PY Yield Strength
The yield strength default value is set based
on the default value of the SGR parameter.
NSF 1.0
Net tension factor for tension capacity
calculation.
SGR 0.0
Steel grade as per table 3.1 in EC3.
0.0 = Fe 360 1.0 = Fe 430 2.0 = Fe
510
SBLT 0.0
Indicates if the section is rolled or built-up.
0.0 = Rolled 1.0 = Built-up.
CMM 1.0
Indicates type of loading on member.
Can take a value from 1 to 6.
Refer to Table 5B.2 for more information on its
use.
CMN 1.0
Indicates the level of End-Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity 0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and other end fixed
DMAX 100.0 cm
Maximum allowable depth for the member.
DMIN 0
Minimum required depth for the member.
RATIO 1
Permissible ratio of loading to capacity.
BEAM 0
Indicates the number of sections to be
checked for during the design.
= Check the end sections only or the locations
Section 5B

5-16
Table 5B.1 Steel Design Parameters EC3
Parameter Default Definition
Name
Value
= Consider 13 sections along the member and
select the maximum Mz location for the design
check.
= Same as BEAM = 1.0 but checks the end
sections of the member as well.
= Consider 13 sections along the member and
design check every section.
CODE Undefined
User must specify EC3.
TRACK 0
Controls the level of descriptivity of output.
0 = Minimum
1 = Intermediate
2 = Maximum
4 = option 4 for performing a deflection check
UNF 1.0
Unsupported buckling length as a factor of the
beam length
LEG 0.0
Connection type
LVV Maximum of Lyy
and Lzz
(Lyy is a term used
by BS5950)
Buckling length for angle about its principle
axis
FU
Ultimate tensile strength of steel
DFF None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
Deflection limit
DJ1 Start Joint
of member
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation
of "Deflection Length"
DJ2 End Joint of
member
"Deflection Length"

Section 5B

5-17
Notes:

1. LEG - Table 25 BS5950 for Fastener Control

The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee
sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the
connection provided at the end of the member. To define the
appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned
to the member.

The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter
required to match the BS5950 connection definition:-

Clause LEG
long leg 3.0
short leg 0.0
4.7.10.2
Single Angle

(b) - 1 bolt
long leg 2.0

long leg 7.0
short leg 2.0 (b) - 1 bolt
long leg 6.0
long leg 1.0 (c) - 2 bolts
short leg 5.0
long leg 0.0
4.7.10.3
Double Angle

(d) - 1 bolt
short leg 4.0

Channels (b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0

Tee Sections (b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0

Section 5B

5-18
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the
geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The
effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:-

La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ

The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to
c
for the weaker principal
axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to
c
for the stronger principal
axis.

Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not
known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG
parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal
axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.

For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply
with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from
user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an
eleventh value, r
vv
, should be supplied at the end of the ten
existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the
single angle making up the pair.
2. BEAM

Ensure that the BEAM parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while
performing code checking for members susceptible to Lateral -
Torsional Buckling.

Section 5B

5-19
Table 5B.2

Section 5B

5-20
5B.3 Worked Examples
Example 1: Restrained simply supported beam.

The figure below shows a simply supported beam spanning 7
meters and assumed to be fully restrained laterally. Fe 430 steel is
assumed and the beam will be checked to the clauses of EC3
currently implemented in STAAD.

Unfactored Loading

Permanent Load:
UDL including selfweight assume 20 KN/m

Variable Load:
UDL load assume 25 KN/m

Partial safety factor for permanent load (ULS) 1.35
Partial safety factor for variable load (ULS) 1.5

Factored Load: 1.35 X 15 + 1.5 X 25 = 64.5 KN/m

64.5 KN/m

Section 5B

5-21
Try 457 X 191 X 82UB.

h = 460.2 mm d = 407.9mm t
w
= 9.9 mm

b = 191.3 mm t
f
= 16.0 mm A = 104.5cm
2

l
y
= 37103 cm
4
W
pl. y
= 1833 cm
3
A
v

= 48.13 cm
2

Grade Fe 430 F
y
= 275 N/mm
2


Outstand Flanges in Compression, limit for rolled section
c/t = 10e = 9.2
c/t ratio for the selected section is 95.65/16 = 5.9 < 9.2
Flange is therefore a class 1 element.

Web with N.A. at mid depth, limit for rolled section
d/t
w
= 72e = 66.6
d/ t
w
ratio for the selected section is 407.9/9.9 = 41.2 < 66.6
Web is therefore a class 1 element.

Shear Resistance

Maximum design shear force (64.5 X 7) / 2 = 225.7 KN

Plastic shear resistance V
pl. Rd
= (A
v
/ gM0) (f
y
/ 3 )
= (4813 / 1.1) (275 / 1.732) / 1000
= 694.7 KN

Maximum design shear force = 225.7 KN < 694.7 KN
Therefore shear resistance is satisfactory.

Section is class 1
Section 5B

5-22
Moment Resistance

Maximum design moment at mid-span of beam
(wl
2
/ 8) = 395 Knm

Maximum resistance of section M
c. Rd
= ( W
pl. y
f
y
) / gM0
= (1833 X 10
3
X 275) / (1.1 X 10
6
)
= 458.2KNm


As it is assumed that the full length of member is restrained
laterally there is no need to check for Lateral Torsional Buckling
of the member.

Maximum design moment = 395 KNm < 458.2 KNm
Therefore moment resistance is satisfactory.
457 X 191 X 82 UB In Fe 430 Steel is satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-23
Example 2: Unrestrained simply supported beam.

Figure 2 shows a simply supported beam spanning 5 meters and
assumed to be laterally unrestrained. Fe 430 steel is assumed and
the beam will be checked to the clauses of EC3 currently
implemented in STAAD.

5m

Unfactored Loading

Permanent Load:
UDL including selfweight assume 15 KN/m

Variable Load:
UDL load assume 20 KN/m

Partial safety factor for permanent load (ULS) 1.35
Partial safety factor for variable load (ULS) 1.5

Factored Load: 1.35 X 15 + 1.5 X 20 = 50.3 KN/m

50.3 KN/m

5m

Section 5B

5-24
Try 457 X 191 X 82 UB.

h = 460.2 mm d = 407.9 mm t
w
= 9.9 mm

b = 191.3 mm t
f
= 16.0 mm A = 104.5 cm
2

l
y
= 37103cm
4
W
pl. y
= 1833cm
3
A
v
= 48.13cm
2

Grade Fe 430f
y
= 275 N/mm
2

Outstand Flanges in compression, limit for rolled section
c/t = 10e = 9.2

d/t
w
= 72e = 66.6
d/ t
w

Shear Resistance

Maximum design shear force (50.3 X 5) / 2 = 120.8 KN

pl. Rd
= (A
v
/ gM0) (f
y
/ 3 )
= (4813 / 1.1) (275 / 1.732) / 1000
= 694.7 KN

Maximum design shear force = 120.8 KN < 694.7 KN
Therefore shear resistance is satisfactory.

Section is class 1

Section 5B

5-25
Moment Resistance

Maximum design moment at mid-span of beam
(wl
2
/ 8) = 157.2 KNm

Maximum resistance of section M
c. Rd
= ( W
pl. y
f
y
) / gM0
= (1833 X 10
3
X 275) / (1.1 X 10
6
)
= 458.2KNm


Buckling resistance moment M
b. Rd
= X
LT
b
w
W
Pl. y
f
y
/ gM1

b
w
= 1 for Class 1 or Class 2 sections.

X
LT
=
0.5
LT
2
LT
2
LT
] l [f f
1
+

f
LT
= 0.5 [1 + a
LT
( l
LT
0.2 ) + l
2
LT
]

a
LT
= 0.21 for rolled sections.

l
LT
= [ l
LT
/ l
1
] [b
w
]
0. 5

l
1
= 93.9e

l
LT
is the geometrical slenderness ratio for lateral-torsional
buckling.

l
LT
=
/25.66] ) (L/a [1 ) (C
L/i
2
LT
0.5
1
LT
+

a
LT
= ( I
w
/ l
t
)
0. 5

Maximum design moment = 157.2 KNm < 458.2 KNm
Therefore moment resistance is satisfactory.
Section 5B

5-26
l
w
= l
z
h
s
2
/ 4

h
s
= h - t
f

i
LT
= [l
z
I
w
/ W
pl. y
2
]
0. 25

C
1
is a factor depending on transverse loading type.
For the selected section:

h
s
= 460.2 16.0 = 444.2 mm

l
w
= 1871 X 44.42
2
/ 4 = 922934.6 cm
6

i
LT
= [1871 X 922934.6 / (1833
2
) ]
0. 25
=

4.76 cm

a
LT
= ( 922934.6 / 69.2 )
0. 5
=

115.4 cm

C
1
= 1.132 (From EC3 Table F.1.2)

l
LT
=
0.25 2 0.5
/25.66] ) (500/115.4 [1 1.132
500/4.76
+
= 86.06

l
1
= 93.9 (235 / 275)
0. 5
86.8

l
LT
= 86.06 / 86.8 0.99

f
LT
= 0.5 [1 + 0.21 (0.99 0.2) + 0.99
2
] 1.07

X
LT
= 1 / { 1.07 + [ 1.07
2
0.99
2
]
0. 5
} 0.67

M
b. Rd
= 0.67 X 1 X 1833 X 10
3
X 275 / 1.1 X 10
6

M
b. Rd
= 307.0 KNm

Maximum design moment = 157.2 KNm < 307.0 KNm
Therefore buckling resistance moment is satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-27
Example 3: Axially Loaded Column.

Figure 3 shows a pinned end column 5m long subject to a factored
load of 3500 kN. Fe 430 steel is assumed and the column will be
checked to the clauses of EC3 currently implemented in STAAD.

3500 KN

5m

3500 KN

Try 305 X 305 X 158 UC

h = 327.2 mm d = 246.6 mm t
w
= 15.7 mm

b = 310.6 mm t
f
= 25.0 mm A = 210.2 cm
2

i
y
= 13.9 cm i
z
= 7.89 cm f
y
= 275 N/ mm
2


Outstand flanges in compression, limit for rolled section
c/t = 10e = 9.2
Section 5B

5-28
d/t
w
= 33e = 30.5
d/ t
w

Compressive resistance

Design compression resistance of the cross-section,
N
c. Rd
= ( A
fy
) / gM0

N
c. Rd
= ( 210.2 X 10
2
X 275 ) / ( 1.1 X 10
3
)

N
c. Rd
= 5255 KN

Buckling resistance

The design buckling resistance of the member N
b. Rd
= Xb
A
Af
y
/
gM0

b
A
= 1 for class 1, 2 or 3 cross-sections.

X is a reduction factor for the relevant buckling mode.

X =
5 . 0
2
_
2
] l f [ f
1
+

f = 0.5 [ 1 + a (
_
l 0.2) +
2
_
l ]

a is an imperfection factor.

_
l = [ l / l
1
] [ b
A
]
0. 5

l is the slenderness for the relevant buckling mode.
Section is class 1
Applied design load N
Sd
= 3500 KN < 5255
Therefore compression resistance is satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-29

l
1
= 93.9 e

From table 5.5.3 for buckling about y-y-axis, a is 0.34.

From table 5.5.3 for buckling about z-z axis, a is 0.49.

l
y
= 500 / 13.9

l
y
= 35.97

lz = 500 / 7.89

lz = 63.37

Consider buckling about the y-y axis.

_
l
y
= [ l
y
/ l
1
] [b
A
]
0. 5

l
1
= 93.9 X 0.924 = 86.8

_
l
y
= [35.9 / 86.8 ] = 0.41

f
y
= 0.5 [1 + a
y
(
_
l
y
0.2) + l
2
y
]

f
y
= 0.5 [1 + 0.34 (0.41 0.2) + 0.41
2
]

f
y
= 0.62
X
y
=
0.5
y
2
_
y
2
y
] l [f f
1
+
=
0.5 2 2
] 0.41 [0.62 0.62
1
+

X
y
= 0.92 but cannot be greater than 1, therefore X
y
= 0.92.

N
b. Rdy
= X
y
Af
y
/ gM0 = (0.92 X 275 X 201.2 X 10
2
) / (1.1 X 10
3
)
= 4627KN

Section 5B

5-30
Consider buckling about the z-z axis.

_
l
z
= [ l
z
/ l
1
] [b
A
]
0. 5

l
1
= 93.9 X 0.924 = 86.8

_
l
z
= [63.37 / 86.8 ] = 0.73

f
z
= 0.5 [1 + a
z
(
_
l
z
0.2) +
2
_
l
z
]

f
z
= 0.5 [1 + 0.49 (0.73 0.2) + 0.73
2
]

f
z
= 0.89
X
z
=
5 . 0
z
2
_
z
2
z
] l f [ f
1
+
=
0.5 2 2
] 0.73 [0.89 0.89
1
+

X
z
= 0.71 but cannot be greater than 1, therefore X
z
= 0.71.

N
b. Rdz
= X
z
Af
z
/ gM0 = (0.71 X 275 X 201.2 X 10
2
) / (1.1 X 10
3
)
= 3571KN

3400 KN design load is less than 3571 KN, therefore section is
satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-31
Example 4: Column subject to axial load and
bending

The figure below shows a pinned end column 5m long subject to a
factored load of 1500 KN and factored bending moment of 250
KNm about the major axis. Fe 430 steel is assumed and the column
will be checked to the clauses of EC3 currently implemented in
STAAD.

Try 305 X 305 X 137 UC

h = 320.5 mm d = 246.6 mm t
w
= 13.8 mm

b = 308.7mm t
f
= 21.7 mm A = 174.6cm
2

W
pl. y
= 2298cm
3
W
el. y
= 2049 cm
3
A
v
= 50.6 cm
2

i
y
= 13.7 cm i
z
= 7.82 cm f
y
= 275 N/mm
2

Section 5B

5-32
Section classification

Shear Resistance

Maximum design shear force 250 / 5 = 50 KN

pl. Rd
= ( A
v
/ gM0 ) ( f
y
/ 3 )
= (5060 / 1.1) (275 / 1.732) / 1000
= 730 KN

Moment Resistance

Design bending moment must not exceed the reduced plastic
resistance moment of the section given by the following equations.

M
Ny. Rd
= M
pl. y. Rd
( 1 n ) / ( 1 0.5 a )

a = ( A 2bt
f
) / A but a must not exceed 0.5.

n = N
sd
/ N
pl. Rd

If n does not exceed a then M
Ny. Rd
= M
pl. y. Rd

a = ( 17460 2 X 308.7 X 21.7 ) / 17460

a = 0.232

N
pl. Rd
= ( 275 X 17460 ) ( 1.1 X 1000 ) = 4365 KN

n = 1500 / 4365 = 0.343

Section by inspection is class 1.
Design shear force is less than 730 KN. Shear resistance is
satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-33
M
pl. y. Rd
=

( 275 X 2298 ) / ( 1.1 X 1000 ) = 574.5 KN

M
Ny. Rd
= 574.5 ( 1 0.343 ) / ( 1 0.5 X 0.232 )

M
Ny. Rd
= 426.97 KNm

Flexural Buckling and Bending Check

Members subject to axial load and bending must satisfy:

/gM1 Af X
N
y min
sd
+
/gM1 f W
M K
y pl.y
y.sd y
1

K
y
= 1 -
y y
sd y
Af X
N m
but K
y
1.5

m
y
=
_
l
y
(2b
My
4) +
el.y
el.y pl.y
W
W W
but m
y
0.90

X
min
is the lesser of X
y
and X
z
, where X
y
and X
z
are reduction
factors as calculated in the previous example.

b
My
is equivalent moment factor for flexural buckling.

From Figure 5.5.3 in EC3,

b
My
= 1.8 0.7 y but in this example, y = 0.0

b
My
= 1.8

The design bending moment is less than the reduced moment
capacity. The section therefore has sufficient moment resistance.
Section 5B

5-34
Consider buckling about the y-y axis.

_
l
y
= [ l
y
/ l
1
] [b
A
]
0. 5
b
A
= 1.0 for class 1 sections.

l
1
= 93.9 X 0.924 = 86.8

l
y
= [500 / 13.7 ] = 36.5

_
l
y
= [36.5 / 86.8 ] = 0.42

f
y
= 0.5 [1 + a
y
(
_
l
y
0.2) + l
2
y
]

f
y
= 0.5 [1 + 0.34 (0.42 0.2) + 0.42
2
]

f
y
= 0.62
X
y
=
0.5
y
2
y
2
y
] l [f f
1
+
=
0.5 2 2
] 0.42 [0.62 0.62
1
+

X
y
= 0.93 but 1, therefore X
y
= 0.93.

Consider buckling about the z-z axis.

_
l
z
= [ l
z
/ l
1
] [b
A
]
0. 5
b
A
= 1.0 for class 1 sections.

l
1
= 93.9 X 0.924 = 86.8

l
z
= [500 / 7.82 ] = 63.9

_
l
z
= [63.9 / 86.8] = 0.73

f
z
= 0.5 [1 + a
z
(
_
l
z
0.2) +
_
l
2
z
]

f
z
= 0.5 [1 + 0.49 (0.73 0.2) + 0.73
2
]

f
z
= 0.89

Section 5B

5-35
X
z
=
0.5
z
2
_
z
2
z
] l [f f
1
+
=
0.5 2 2
] 0.73 [0.89 0.89
1
+

X
z
= 0.71 but 1, therefore X
z
= 0.71.

X
min
is therefore 0.71.

_
l
y
= 0.42

m
y
= 0.42 (2 X 1.8 4) +
2049
2049 2298
= - 0.046

K
y
= 1 -
X275 0.93X17.46
0.046X1500
= 1.015 1.5

/gM1 Af X
N
y min
sd
+
/gM1 f W
M K
y pl.y
y.sd y
1

X275/1.1 0.71X17.46
1500
+
1.1 2.298X275/
1.015X250
= 0.92 1

Members for which lateral-torsional buckling is a potential
problem must also satisfy:

/gM1 Af X
N
y z
sd
+
/gM1 f W X
M K
y pl.y LT
y.sd LT
1

K
LT
= 1 -
y z
sd LT
Af X
N m
but K
LT
1

m
LT
= 0.15 l
z
b
M. LT
0.15, but m
LT
0.90

Using the equations used in Example 2, we have the following.

Section 5B

5-36
For the selected selection:

i
LT
= 8.33 cm

a
LT
= 97.6 cm

C
1
= 1.879 (From EC3 Table F.1.2)

l
LT
=
0.25 2 0.5
/25.66] (500/97.6) [1 1.879
500/8.33
+
= 36.71

l
1
= 93.9 (235 / 275)
0. 5
= 86.8

l
LT
= 36.71 / 86.8 = 0.42

f
LT
= 0.5 [ 1 + 0.21 (0.42 0.2) + 0.42
2
] = 0.61

X
LT
= 1 / { 0.61 + [ 0.61
2
0.42
2
]
0. 5
} = 0.95

b
MLT
= 1.8

lz = 0.73

m
LT
= 0.15 X 0.73 X 1.8 0.15 = 0.047

K
LT
= 1 -
X275 0.71X17.46
0.047X1500
= 0.98

/gM1 Af X
N
y z
sd
+
/gM1 f W X
M K
y pl.y LT
y.sd LT
1

X275/1.1 0.71X17.46
1500
+
X275/1.1 0.95X2.298
0.98X250
= 0.932

305X305X137UC is therefore satisfactory.

Section 5B

5-37
5B.4 Users Examples

Example 1.

The following input file is for the single beam in example 1. Only
code check related output is enclosed.

STAAD PLANE INPUT FILE FOR EX.1 IN THE EC3 MANUAL.
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 5.000 0.000 0.000
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH
1 TABLE ST UB457X191X82
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MZ
LOAD 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY-20.0
LOAD 2
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -25.0
LOAD COMBINATION 3
1 1.35 2 1.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER
CODE EC3
UNL 0.0 ALL
BEAM 2.0 ALL
TRACK 2 .ALL
SGR 1 .ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Section 5B

5-38

Section 5B

5-39
Example 2.

The following input file is for the beam in example 2. Only code
check related output is enclosed.

STAAD PLANE INPUT FILE FOR EXAMPLE 2
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 5.000 0.000 0.000
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH
1 TABLE ST UB457X191X82
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MZ
LOAD 1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -15.0
LOAD 2
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -20.0
LOAD COMBINATION 3
1 1.35 2 1.5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER
CODE EC3
BEAM 2.0 ALL
TRACK 2. ALL
SGR 1. ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Section 5B

5-40

Section 5B

5-41
Example 3.

The following input file is for the simple column in example 3.
Only code check related output is enclosed.

STAAD PLANE INPUT FILE FOR EXAMPLE 3.
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0
2 0 5 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH
1 TA ST UC305X305X158
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
SUPPORT
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -3500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETERS
CODE EC3
TRACK 2.0 ALL
SGR 1. ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Section 5B

5-42

Section 5B

5-43
Example 4.

The following input file is for the column in example 4. Only code
check related output is enclosed.

STAAD PLANE INPUT FILE FOR EXAMPLE 4.
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0
2 0 5 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH
1 TA ST UC305X305X137
CONSTANTS
E STEEL ALL
SUPPORT
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FY MZ
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
2 MZ 250
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETERS
CODE EC3
BEAM 2.0 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
CMM 6
SGR 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Section 5B

5-44

Section 6
French Codes

Alkjdflakjsfd

6-1

Concrete Design Per B.A.E.L.

STAAD has the capabilities for performing design of concrete
beams, columns and slabs according to B.A.E.L. - 1983. Given the
width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section,
STAAD will calculate the required reinforcing to resist the various
input loads.
perform design per B.A.E.L. These parameters not only act as a
method to input required data for code calculations but give the
engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, of
commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have
been used for simplicity. Table 5A.1 contains a complete list of
available parameters and their default values.
6A.3 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration
STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the
slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members.
The first method is a procedure which takes into account second
order effects. Here, STAAD accounts for the secondary moments,
due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS
command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint
displacements of the structure, calculates the additional moments
induced in the structure. Therefore, by using PDELTA
Section
6A
Section 6A

6-2
ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no
user modification before beginning member design.

The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account
for the slenderness effect is through user supplied moment
magnification factors. Here the user approximates the additional
moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be
multiplied before beginning member design.

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 to 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300.
11 13 PR YD 300.

mm depth and 300 mm width) and the second set of members, with
with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for
these members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in
analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided,
the program will calculate values from YD and ZD.

Section 6A

6-3
6A.5 Beam Design
Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of
beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create
moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total
number of sections considered is twelve, unless that number is
redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical
moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed, with cut-off lengths calculated to include required
development length.

Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments.
From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no
torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.

Table 6A.1 French Concrete Design Parameters

Name Value
FYMAIN * 300 N/mm
2
FYSEC * 300 N/mm
2
FC * 30 N/mm
2
CLEAR * 20 mm Clearance of reinforcing bar. Value is
automatically set to 20 mm for C35 and
higher.
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm
- 60mm).
(8mm - 60mm).
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm
- 60mm).
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.
(Only considers shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending).
Section 6A

6-4
Table 6A.1 French Concrete Design Parameters

Name Value
EFACE *0.0 Face of Support Location at end of beam.
(Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as
positive numbers.).
TRACK 0.0 Critical Moment will not be printed out with
beam design report. A value of 1.0 will mean
a print out.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the design moments will be
magnified.
considered in finding critical moments for
beam design.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value
PROPERTIES.
* These values must be provided in the units the user is currently
using for input.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE FRENCH
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
SFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
EFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Section 6A

6-5
6A.6 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the
ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The
loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the
circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the
reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each
side. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple
of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some
cases.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE FRENCH
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5
END CONCRETE DESIGN
Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To
design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements.
The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter II,
section 6.40.

moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter
2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required
Section 6A

6-6
to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and
the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as
transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and
CLEAR listed in Table 5A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other
parameters mentioned in Table 5A.1 are not applicable to slab
design.

LONG.
TRANS.
X
Y
Z
M
M
M
M
x
y
x
y


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE FRENCH
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

6-7

Steel Design Per the French Code

STAAD implementation of French Steel Design is based on Centre
Technique Industriel de la Construction Metallique publication
entitled "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork."

proportioned according to the limit states of which they would
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-
states are recognized: ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and
stability; that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that uniform reliability is achieved
for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the
same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably
remote.

section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria, as
depths, desired section type, or other related parameters. The code
checking portion of the program verifies that code requirements
for each selected section are met and also identifies the governing
criteria.
Section
6B
Steel Design per the French Code
Section 6B

6-8
The following sections describe the salient features of STAAD
implementation of "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." A
detailed description of the design process, along with its
underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the
specification document.
6B.2 Basis of Methodology
The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits
the usage of elastic analysis. Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic
analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments in the
members. However, strength and stability considerations are based
on the principles of plastic behaviour. Axial compression buckling
and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for
calculation of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance
of members. Slenderness calculations are made and overall
geometric stability is checked for all members.
The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the
procedures outlined in section 4 of this specification. Note that the
program automatically considers co-existence of axial force, shear
and bending in calculating section capacities.

For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed.
For axial compression capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used.

Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the
procedures of sections 4.5 and 4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is
considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per section
5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 6B.1)
must be used to specify the unsupported length of the compression
flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is
also referred to as twisting length.

Section 6B

6-9
6B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending
The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for
interaction of axial forces and bending. Appropriate interaction
equations are used and the governing criteria is determined.
design decisions from the engineer to the program, thus allowing
specific needs.

The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular
design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be
changed to exactly model the physical structure.
6B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available in
STAAD implementation of CM 66 (Revn. 80). For general
information on these options, refer to Chapter II, sections 3.4 and
3.5. For information on specification of these commands, refer to
Chapter II, and section 6.46.
Results of code checking and member selection are presented in
the output file in a tabular format.

Please note the following: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section
of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which governed the design.
Section 6B

6-10
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member
capacities will be printed. The following is a detailed description
of printed items:

PC = Member Compression Capacity
TR = Member Tension Capacity
MUZ = Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY = Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ = Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY = Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)

Table 6B.1 French Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
KY 1.0 K value for axial compression buckling about
local Y-axis. Usually, this is the minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for axial compression buckling about
local Z-axis. Usually, this is the major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness ratio about
Y-axis for axial compression.
LZ Member Length Length to calculate slenderness ratio about
Z-axis for axial compression.
UNL Member Length Unsupported length of compression flange
for calculating moment resistance.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction of
member length.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress printing of all
design strengths.
1.0 = Print all design strengths.
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth (used in member
selection).
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth (used in member
selection).
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect and
design strength.

Section 6B

6-11
Table 6B.1 French Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end
moments and those at
locations specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate moments at tenth
points along the beam, and
use maximum Mz for
design.

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural
members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The
member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry
out a number of different design operations. These facilities may
be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the
design problem. The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the
design.
Specify whether to perform code checking or member
selection.
values.


Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP
shapes, angle, double angle, channel, double channel, beams with
cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic
properties.
Section 6B

6-12


UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

6B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library
for these members.

An example of the member property specification in an input file is
provided at the end of this section.

user interface.


Section 6B

6-13
IPE Shapes

10 15 TA ST IPE140
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180

HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.

3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100

IPN Shapes
The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE
shapes.

25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200
23 56 TA ST IPN380

T Shapes
by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For
example,

1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120

Section 6B

6-14
U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel
sections.

1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A

Double U Channels

11 TA D UAP150
17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5

channel UAP150 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a
double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length units
between the channels.

Angles

16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
a leg thickness of 2.7mm. This specification may be used when the
local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification
"RA" (reverse angle) should be used instead of ST.

17 21 TA RA L25X25X4

Section 6B

6-15
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5

Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only
the number 4 appears in the section name, the decimal part is not
part of the section name.

Double Angles

33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L80X40X6
43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75

Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth,
width and wall thickness as shown below.

64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7
66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm
and a wall thickness of 2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a
depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall thickness of 8.0mm.
Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name.

Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table
designations. For example,


Section 6B

6-16
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units,
and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no
member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in
this way.

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical
value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the
decimal portion of the value provided for the diameter. The following
example illustrates the designation.

8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6
3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5

Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness
of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64 and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having
a wall thickness of 12.5mm.



specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia.
of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection will
be performed if this type of specification is used.

SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM

Section 6B

6-17
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
Section 6B

6-18

Section 7
German Codes

Aslkdfj;alskjdf

7-1

Concrete Design Per DIN 1045

on the DIN 1045 - November 1989. Slab design is also available
but this follows the requirements of Baumann, Munich, which is
the basis for Eurocode 2. Design for a member involves
calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the
member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties
and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the
details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross
section are also reported in the output.
designed.

For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
input:

Section
7A
Section 7A 7-2
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.

with 350mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
Considerations
compression members. There are two options by which the
slenderness effect can be accommodated.

The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN
1045 17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as the basis for commonly used
design charts considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the
slenderness moment exceeds 70. This method has been adopted in
the column design in STAAD per the DIN code.

The second option is to compute the secondary moments through
an analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of
the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member.
The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from
an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then
evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command
PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the
input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this
analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as

Section 7A

7-3
automatically. The column is designed for the total moment which
is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The secondary
moments can be compared to those calculated using the charts of
DIN 1045.
7A.5 Beam Design
forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the
critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total
number of sections considered is 13 (e.g. 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5,
.6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to
determine the design force envelopes.

Design for Flexure
beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments
are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned
sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist these critical
sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced
sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as
a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the
first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the
assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
single or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed
again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per the DIN code.
Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the
design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the
Section 7A 7-4
detailer taking into account of other practical considerations), the user
has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13
equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.

Design for Shear and Torsion
Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section
17.5 of DIN 1045. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both
shear forces and torsional moments. Shear and torsional design is
performed at the start and end sections of the member at a distance
"d" away from the node of the member where "d" is the effective
depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum shear forces
from amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional
moments are used in the design. The capacity of the concrete in
shear and torsion is determined at the location of design and the
balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed that no
bent-up bars are available from the flexural reinforcement to carry
and "balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care
of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are
assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed
hoops for beams subject to torsion.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Section 7A

7-5
7A.6 Column Design
The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-figure 13, for
calculating the equilibrium equations for rectangular and circular
sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The
user has control of the effective length (sk) in each direction by
using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described on Table 6A.1.
This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along with e/d to
meet the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4.

Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular
sections. Square and rectangular columns are designed with
reinforcement distributed on all four sides equally. That means the
total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This
may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. The
TRACK parameter may be used to obtain the design details in
various levels of descriptivity.


UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
Section 7A 7-6
7A.7 Slab Design
To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and
analysed. The command specifications are in accordance with
Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Slabs
are designed to specifications as described by BAUMANN of
MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode 2.

to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement
and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters are those
applicable to slab design:

1. FYMAIN Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
2. FC Concrete grade
3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to
the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on
both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. SRA Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of
the required transverse reinforcement relative to
the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement for
the calculation of BAUMANN design forces.

The other parameters shown in Table 7A.1 are not applicable to
slab design.

BAUMANN equations
If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx
and My forces which are obtained from the STAAD analysis. The
SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to
introduce resolved BAUMANN forces into the design replacing
the pure Mx and My moments. These new design moments allow
the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section,
resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may

Section 7A

7-7
be considered. If SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be
assumed. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given
in degrees measured from the local element X axis anticlockwise
(positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and
shown in the design format.

The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10mm in the
longitudinal direction and 8mm in the transverse. The longitudinal
bar is the layer closest to the slab exterior face.
design being performed. Table 7A.1 of this manual contains a
complete list of the available parameters and their default values.
It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and
Newton before performing the concrete design.

Table 7A.1 German Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
FYMAIN 420 N/mm
2
Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs
it is 500 N/mm
2
for both directions)
FYSEC 420N/mm
2
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement.
Applicable to shear and torsion reinforcement
in beams
FC 25N/mm
2
Concrete Yield Stress/ cube strength
MINMAIN 16mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size
[Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 25
32 40 50]
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar
size. Applicable to shear and torsion
reinforcement in beams.

Section 7A 7-8

Parameter
Name
CLEAR 25mm Clear cover for reinforcement measured
from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar
size. Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN
above.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam,
measured from the start joint. (Only
applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending)
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam,
measured from the end joint. (NOTE:
Both SFACE & EFACE must be positive
numbers.)
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed
with beam design report.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel %
and spacing. For columns gives a
detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2.0 = For beams gives area of steel
required at intermediate sections.
(see NSECT)
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which design moments are
magnified for column design
considered in finding critical moment for
beam design. The upper limit is 20
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. The default value
is as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. The default value
is as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction
for column design
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z direction
for column design

Section 7A

7-9

Parameter
Name
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout
considering Mxy
A = Skew angle considered in BAUMANN
equations. A is the angle in degrees.
Section 7A 7-10

7-11

Steel Design Per the DIN Code

7B.1 General
implementation of the DIN code of practice for structural steel
design (DIN 18800 and DIN 4114) in STAAD. The design
philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of
elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available
for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure
modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by
stability considerations. The following sections describe the
salient features of the design approach.

exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most
economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the
slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are
recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel
design:

1) Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the
default values.
3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member
selection.
Section
7B
Steel Design per the DIN Code
Section 7B 7-12
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in
using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular
stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic
analysis may also be performed and the results combined with
static analysis results.
For specification of member properties of standard German steel
sections, the steel section library available in STAAD may be
used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to
assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties
may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Program User's
manual.
7B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library
These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these
for these members during the analysis. An example of member
section.

Section 7B

7-13
section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical
user interface.


IPE Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way:

20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140

HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.

25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160

I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following
example illustrates the designation.

14 15 TA ST I200 (indicates an I-section with 200mm depth)

T Shapes
by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For
example,

1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120

Section 7B 7-14
U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two
channel sections. The former (U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a
flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of 260mm.

11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260

Double Channels
them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name
will specify a double channel, e.g. D U180. The spacing between
the double channels is provided following the expression SP.

11 TA D U180
27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (Indicates 2 channels back to back
spaced at 0.5 length units)

Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The

16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5

a leg thickness of 2.5mm. The above specification may be used
when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.

17 21 TA RA L40X20X5

Section 7B

7-15
Double Angles
be specified by using the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of
the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will
serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is provided by
using the word SP and the spacing value following the section
name.

14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by
numerical value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm
omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter.
The following example will illustrate the designation.

8 TO 28 TA ST PIP602.9 (60.3mm dia, 2.9mm wall
thickness)
3 64 67 TA ST PIP40612.5 (406.4mm dia, 12.5mm wall
thickness)



specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in
current length units. Only code checking and no member selection
will be performed if this type of specification is used.

Section 7B 7-16
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,

15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6

is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mmX60mm and
the wall thickness of 3.6mm.

Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height,
Width and Thickness) instead of by their table designations.


is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness
of 0.5 in current length units. Only code checking and no member
selection will be performed for TUBE sections specified this way.

SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220

Section 7B

7-17

* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
FINISH
The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on
DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 7. The procedures of DIN 4114 are
used for stability analysis. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various
conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress,
allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors
such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported
width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the
procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
Section 7B 7-18
member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user
supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present
but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 6B.1)
and proceeds with member selection or code checking.

according to the procedure of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 7.
Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the
cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness
value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ.

Allowable stress for Bending and Shear
The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are
dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness
of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL,
defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are a function of
web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0
for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and
shear capacities.
locations of the member for all modeled loading situations.
Members subjected to axial force and bending are checked using
the criteria of DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition, for
members with compression and bending, the criteria of DIN 4114
(Part 1) - Section 10 is used. Similarly, for members with axial
tension and bending, the criteria of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 15
is used.

Section 7B

7-19
through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 7B.1 of this
chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the
engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been
selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter
values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure.

Table 7B.1 German Steel Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
minor axis.
major axis.
LY Member Length Length in local y-axis to calculate
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length in local z-axis to calculate
slenderness ratio.
PY 240 N/sq.mm Strength of steel.
UNL Member Length Unrestrained member length in lateral
torsional buckling checks.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a factor of
actual member length.
BEAM 0.0 Number of sections to be checked per
member:
0.0 = Design only for end sections.
1.0 = Check at location of maximum MZ
along member.
2.0 = Check ends plus location of beam 1.0
check.
Section 7B 7-20

Parameter
Name
3.0 = Check at every 1/13
th
of the member
length and report the maximum.
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output file:
0.0 = Output summary of results
1.0 = Output summary of results plus
member capacities
2.0 = Output detailed results
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable
stresses
SGR 0.0 Grade of steel:
0.0 = St 37-2
1.0 = St 52-3
2.0 = StE 355
SBLT 0 Specify section as either rolled or built-up:
0 = Rolled
1 = Built-up
Cb 0 Beam coefficient n, defined in Table 9: If
Cb = 0, program will use n = 2.5 for rolled
sections and 2.0 for welded sections.
Cmm 1.0 Moment factor, Zeta, defined in Table 10:
1.0 = fixed ended member with constant
moment, Zeta = 1.0
2.0 = pin ended member with UDL, Zeta =
1.12
3.0 = pin ended member with central point
load, Zeta = 1.35
4.0 = fixed ended member, Zeta calculated
from end moments.
DMAX 1.0 m Maximum allowable depth during member
selection
DMIN 0.0 m Minimum required depth during member
selection

Section 7B

7-21

Parameter
Name
SAME 0.0 Control of sections to try during a SELECT
process:
0.0 = Try every section of the same type as
the original.
1.0 = Try only those with a similar name.
7B.8 Code Checking
section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces
transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is
checked per the DIN requirements.

zero (default), design will be based on member start and end
forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or
FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case,
location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.
Section 7B 7-22
the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES,
PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.


UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE GERMAN
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

Section 8
Indian Codes

Ad;flaksd;lfka

8-1

Concrete Design Per IS456

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design. It will
calculate the reinforcement needed for any concrete section. All
the concrete design calculations are based on limit state
method of IS: 456 (2000).
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams and
L-shapes

input:
Section
8A
Section 8A

8-2

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.

will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of
members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set
numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm
flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange
depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether
the section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or
column design
perform design as per IS:456(2000). Default parameter values
have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A.1 of this
design.
Consideration
compression members. The IS:456 code specifies two options by
which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Clause 39.7).

Section 8A

8-3
One option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into
account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia
on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of
deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the duration of
loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design
moments.

STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first options. To
perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA
ANALYSIS will accommodate all requirements of the second-
order analysis described by IS:456, except for the effects of the
duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely
ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of
loads is negligible in a normal structural configuration.

Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an
approximation, it must be realized that the approximate evaluation
of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this
method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical
formula and assumptions on sidesway
(Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000).

Considering all these information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as
performed by STAAD may be used for the design of concrete
members. However the user must note, to take advantage of this
the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also note that the
provided by user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
8A.6 Beam Design
effect the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all
Section 8A

8-4
number of sections considered is 13 ( e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.
75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the
design force envelopes.

Design for Flexure
resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where
ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced
section, doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the
flanged section are designed only as singly reinforced section
under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections
are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging
moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging
moment. Flexural design of beams are performed in two passes. In
the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with
the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000
(Clause 26.2.3). Although exact curtailment lengths are not
mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be
more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other
practical consideration), user has the choice of printing
reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections
from which the final detail drawing can be prepared.

Section 8A

8-5
Design for Shear
torsional moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally
spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst
the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear
capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement
provided by STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to
take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections.

As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d
where d is the effective depth) close to support has been enhanced,
subjected to a maximum value of
cmax
.

Beam Design Output

reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.)
sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a
more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units.
An example of rectangular beam design output with the default
output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
Section 8A

8-6

============================================================================
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 29.64 1.23 4
| 0.00 -25.68 1.23 4 |
400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 27.97 1.23 4
| 0.00 -16.05 1.23 4 |
800.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 25.12 1.23 4
| 0.00 -7.17 1.23 4 |
1200.0 | 0.00 0.97 0.49 5 | 21.11 1.23 4
| 0.00 -0.14 1.32 6 |
1600.0 | 0.00 6.77 1.23 4 | 15.93 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2000.0 | 0.00 11.06 1.23 4 | 9.59 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2400.0 | 0.00 13.04 1.23 4 | 2.08 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2800.0 | 0.00 12.45 1.23 4 | -5.43 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3200.0 | 0.00 9.55 1.23 4 | -11.77 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3600.0 | 0.00 4.73 1.23 4 | -16.95 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.48 1.23 4
| 0.00 -17.36 1.23 4 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 259.04 161.29 0.00 0.00 176.31
BOTTOM 0.00 160.78 160.78 160.78 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 4-10 3-10 2-10 2-10 3-10
BOTTOM 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
============================================================================

Section 8A

8-7
8A.7 Column Design
ends. All active load case are tested to calculate reinforcement.
The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the
circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for
the sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement
distributed equally in two faces for sections under uniaxial
moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table
8A.1). Depending upon the member lengths, section dimensions
and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD
automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of the column
design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in
the column design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main
reinforcing bars is taken to be 25 mm while arrangement of
longitudinal bars.


output is given in SI units. An example of a long column design
(Ref. Example 9 of SP:16, Design Aids For Reinforced Concrete to
IS:456-1978) output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
Section 8A

8-8

============================================================================
C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 250.0 mm dia. COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 BRACED LONG COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 12.00 12.00
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : 1.12 1.12
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : 1.00 1.00
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : 1.12 1.12
--------------------------
Puz : 992.70 Muz1 : 36.87 Muy1 : 36.87
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 38.6, IS456)
============================================================================

Section 8A

8-9

Table 8A.1 Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters
Parameter
Name
FYMAIN 415 N/mm
2
FYSEC 415 N/mm
2
FC 30 N/mm
2
CLEAR
25 mm
40 mm
For beam members.
For column members
BRACING
0.0
BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial force will be
taken into account for beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the column is unbraced about
major axis.
minor axis.
both axis.
RATIO 4.0
Maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
in columns.
RFACE 4.0 A value of 4.0 means longitudinal reinforcement in
column is arranged equally along 4 faces.
major axis.
minor axis.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value defaults to
ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
PROPERTIES.
Section 8A

8-10
Parameter
Name
For TRACK = 0.0, output consists of reinforcement
details at START, MIDDLE and END.
COLUMN DESIGN:
printed.
With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction analysis
results are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
diagram and intermediate interaction values are
With TRACK = 9.0, the details of section capacity
calculations are printed.
reinforcement.
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of column
about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of column
about minor axis.
TORSION 0.0 A value of 0.0 means torsion to be considered in
beam design.

A value of 1.0 means torsion to be neglected in
beam design.
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main reinforcing
bars in beam and column. For column centre to
centre distance between main bars cannot exceed
300mm.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. It is used
to check against shear at the face of the support in
beam design. The parameter can also be used to
check against shear at any point from the start of
the member.

Section 8A

8-11
Parameter
Name
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam. The
parameter can also be used to check against shear
at any point from the end of the member. (Note:
Both SFACE and EFACE are input as positive
numbers).
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against enhanced shear
strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000.
ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear check to be
performed ( no enhancement of shear strength at
sections close to support)
For ENSH = a positive value(say x ), shear
strength will be enhanced up to a distance x from
the start of the member. This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided into two or more
parts. (Refer note )
For ENSH = a negative value(say y), shear
strength will be enhanced up to a distance y from
the end of the member. This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided into two or more
parts.(Refer note)
If default value (0.0) is used the program will
calculate Length to Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio
is greater than 2.5, shear strength will be enhanced
at sections (<2d) close to support otherwise
ordinary shear check will be performed.

RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of the member
from its nearest support. This parameter is used
only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two
or more parts. (Refer note)
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 8A.8 for
details.

Note: Value of ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used
only when the span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts.
When this condition is aroused RENSH parameter is also to be
used.
Section 8A

8-12

The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L
metre. The shear strength will be enhanced up to X metre from
both supports. The input should be the following:

Steps:

ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced
throughout the length of the member 1,
positive sign indicates length
measured from start of the member

ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a
length (X-L) of the member 2, length
measured from the start of the member

ENSH L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced
throughout the length of the member 4,
negative sign indicates length
measured from end of the member

ENSH (X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to
a length (X-L) of the member 3, length
measured from the end of the member

RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L
from both the members 2 and 3.

Section 8A

8-13
DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4 => This will enhance the shear strength
up to length X from both ends of the
beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and
gives spacing accordingly.

At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
where c, enhanced = 2dc/av

At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will
become infinity. However for any section shear stress cannot
exceed c, max. Hence enhanced shear strength is limited to a
maximum value of c, max.
8A.8 Bar Combination
Initially, the program selects only one bar to calculate the number
of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along
the length of the beam. Now, two bar diameters can be specified to
calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section.
The syntax for bar combination is given below.

START BAR COMBINATION
MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list>
END BAR COMBINATION

Section 8A

8-14
MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The
typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 2166.7 | 2166.7- 6500.0 | 6500.0- 8666.7 |
| mm | mm | mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 6-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 |
| in 2 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 2330.22 | 1029.90 | 582.55 |
Prov| 2376.79 | 1119.64 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-20 | 2-20 | 2-20 |
Ast Reqd| 1165.11 | 582.55 | 582.55 |
Prov| 1257.14 | 628.57 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one
at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two
ends of each section.

8-15


8A1.1 Design Operations
Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause
inelastic deformations in the structure. If the structure is brittle,
sudden failure could occur. But if the structure is made to behave
ductile, it will be able to sustain the earthquake effects better with
some deflection larger than the yield deflection by absorption of
energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential element
for safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks.

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design as per
IS 13920. While designing it satisfies all provisions of IS 456
2000 and IS 13920 for beams and columns.
8A1.2 Section Types for Concrete Design
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) & T-shape

Section
8A1
Section 8A1

8-16
8A1.3 Design Parameters
The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to
perform design as per IS 13920. It accepts all parameters that are
needed to perform design as per IS:456. Over and above it has
some other parameters that are required only when designed is
performed as per IS:13920. Default parameter values have been
suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A1.1 of this
design.
8A1.4 Beam Design
effect of the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all
number of sections considered is 13. All of these sections are
scanned to determine the design force envelopes.

For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the
member shall not be less than 200mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the
member shall preferably have a width-to depth ratio of more than
0.3 (Clause 6.1.2).

The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck
(Clause 6.1.1) for all active load cases. If it exceeds allowable
axial stress no design will be performed.

Section 8A1

8-17
Design for Flexure
Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while
designing following criteria are satisfied as per IS-13920:

1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause
5.2)

2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used.
(Clause 5.3)

3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is
given by
min
= 0.24fck/fy (Clause 6.2.1b)

The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by
max
= 0.025 (Clause 6.2.2)

4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half
the negative steel at that face. (Clause 6.2.3)

5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any
section, shall at least be equal to one-fourth of the maximum
negative moment steel provided at the face of either joint. (Clause
6.2.4)

Design for Shear

The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the
Clause 6.3.3 of IS 13920:1993 revision. Elastic sagging and
hogging moments of resistance of the beam section at ends are
considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging and
hogging moments of resistance can also be considered for shear
design if PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer
Table 8A1.1)

torsional moments. Procedure is same as that of IS 456.

Section 8A1

8-18
The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for
shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS-13920:

The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of
the beam shall not exceed

a) d/4

b) 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars

In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm.

The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated
from IS 456 consideration is provided.

Beam Design Output

reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced sections along the
length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All
beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of
rectangular beam design output with the default output option
(TRACK 1.0) is presented below:

Section 8A1

8-19
============================================================================
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 17.67 0.00 4
| 0.00 -2.74 0.00 5 |
291.7 | 0.00 1.15 0.00 5 | 16.26 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
583.3 | 0.00 4.61 0.00 5 | 13.97 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
875.0 | 0.00 7.44 0.00 5 | 10.78 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1166.7 | 0.00 9.41 0.00 5 | 6.69 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1458.3 | 0.00 10.33 0.00 5 | 1.10 0.00 5
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
1750.0 | 0.00 9.98 0.00 5 | -3.60 0.00 5
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2041.7 | 0.00 8.23 0.00 5 | -10.02 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2333.3 | 0.00 5.21 0.00 5 | -15.00 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2625.0 | 0.00 1.14 0.00 5 | -19.08 0.00 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2916.7 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -22.27 0.00 4
| 0.00 -3.79 0.00 5 |
3208.3 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -24.57 0.00 4
| 0.00 -9.35 0.00 5 |
3500.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.97 0.00 4
| 0.00 -15.34 0.00 5 |
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 68.60 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-
13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 3500.0 IS 75.24 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-
13920
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 226.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 226.30
BOTTOM 0.00 203.02 203.02 203.02 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 3-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 3-10
BOTTOM 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
============================================================================
Section 8A1

8-20
8A1.5 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS
456:2000. Columns are also designed for shear forces as per
Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken
care of in the column design of STAAD. However following
clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920:

1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20.
(Clause 5.2)
2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used.
(Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less
than 200 mm. For columns having unsupported length
exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column shall not be
less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
4. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the
perpendicular dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4.
(Clause 7.1.3)
5. The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral
dimension of the column, except where special confining
reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3)
6. Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a
length l
o
from each joint face, towards mid span, and on either
side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur. The
length l
o
shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of
the member at the section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of
clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1)
7. The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement
shall not exceed of minimum member dimension but need
not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100 mm. (Clause 7.4.6)

Section 8A1

8-21
8. The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked
against the provisions for minimum area of cross-section of
the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops, to be
used as special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and
7.4.8)

output is given in SI units. An example of a column design output
(with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.

============================================================================
C O L U M N N O. 3 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 350.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : - -
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : - -
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : - -
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : - -
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5
Along Z Along Y
DESIGN SHEAR FORCES : 43.31 76.08
CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 85 mm c/c
over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards
midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920.
--------------------------
Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 : 178.71 Muy1 : 150.75
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
============================================================================
********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS********************
Section 8A1

8-22
Table 8A1.1 Indian Concrete Design IS13920 Parameters
Parameter
Name
FYMAIN 415 N/mm
2
FYSEC 415 N/mm
2
FC 30 N/mm
2
CLEAR 25 mm
40 mm
For beam members.
For column members
BRACING 0.0 BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial force
will be taken into account for beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
about major axis.
about minor axis.
about both axis.
RFACE 4.0 A value of 4.0 means longitudinal
reinforcement in column is arranged equally
along 4 faces.
A value of 2.0 invokes 2 faced distribution
about major axis.
A value of 3.0 invokes 2 faced distribution
about minor axis.

Section 8A1

8-23
Parameter
Name
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value
defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
PROPERTIES.
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of
column about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of
column about minor axis.
reinforcement.
TORSION 0.0 A value of 0.0 means torsion to be
considered in beam design.
A value of 1.0 means torsion to be neglected
in beam design.
reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE
and END.
For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments are
For TRACK = 2.0, required steel for
intermediate sections defined by NSECTION
are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
printed.
With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction
analysis results are printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
diagram and intermediate interaction values
are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output.
Section 8A1

8-24
Parameter
Name
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main
reinforcing bars in beam and column. For
column centre to centre distance between
main bars cannot exceed 300mm.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. It is
used to check against shear at the face of
the support in beam design. The parameter
can also be used to check against shear at
any point from the start of the member.*
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam. The
parameter can also be used to check against
shear at any point from the end of the
member. (Note: Both SFACE and EFACE
are input as positive numbers).*
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against enhanced
shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000.
ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear check to
be performed ( no enhancement of shear
strength at sections close to support)
For ENSH = a positive value(say x ), shear
strength will be enhanced up to a distance x
from the start of the member. This is used
only when a span of a beam is subdivided
into two or more parts. (Refer note after
Table 8A.1 )
For ENSH = a negative value(say y), shear
strength will be enhanced up to a distance y
from the end of the member. This is used
only when a span of a beam is subdivided
into two or more parts.(Refer note after Table
8A.1)
If default value (0.0) is used the program will
calculate Length to Overall Depth ratio. If this
ratio is greater than 2.5, shear strength will
be enhanced at sections (<2d) close to
support otherwise ordinary shear check will
be performed.
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of the
member from its nearest support. This

Section 8A1

8-25
Parameter
Name
parameter is used only when a span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more parts.
(Refer note after Table 8A.1)
EUDL None Equivalent u.d.l on span of the beam. This
load value must be the unfactored load on
span. During design the load value is
multiplied by a factor 1.2. If no u.d.l is defined
factored shear force due to gravity load on
span will be taken as zero. No elastic or
plastic moment will be calculated. Shear
design will be performed based on analysis
result.(Refer note)
GLD None Gravity load number to be considered for
calculating equivalent u.d.l on span of the
beam, in case no EUDL is mentioned in the
input. This loadcase can be any static
loadcase containing MEMBER LOAD on the
beam which includes UNI, CON, LIN and
TRAP member loading. CMOM member
loading is considered only when it is
specified in local direction. FLOOR LOAD is
also considered.
The load can be primary or combination load.
For combination load only load numbers
included in load combination is considered.
The load factors are ignored. Internally the
unfactored load is multiplied by a factor 1.2
during design.
If both EUDL and GLD parameters are
mentioned in the input mentioned EUDL will
be considered in design
Note :
No dynamic (Response spectrum, 1893,
Time History) and moving load cases are
considered.
CMOM member loading in global direction is
not considered.
UMOM member loading is not considered.
Section 8A1

8-26
Parameter
Name
PLASTIC 0.0 Default value calculates elastic hogging and
sagging moments of resistance of beam at its
ends.
A value of 1.0 means plastic hogging and
sagging moments of resistance of beam to
be calculated at its ends.
IPLM 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic
hogging and sagging moments of resistance
of beam at its ends.
A value of 1.0 means calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments
of resistance of beam to be ignored at start
node of beam. This implies no support exists
at start node.
A value of -1.0 means calculation of
of resistance of beam to be considered at
start node of beam. . This implies support
exists at start node.
of resistance of beam to be ignored at end
node of beam. This implies no support exists
at end node.
end node of beam. . This implies support
exists at end node. **
IMB 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic
hogging and sagging moments of resistance
of beam at its ends.
of resistance of beam to be ignored at both
ends of beam. This implies no support exist
at either end of the member.

Section 8A1

8-27
Parameter
Name
both ends of beam. This implies support exist
at both ends of the member.**
COMBINE 0.0 Default value means there will be no member
combination.
A value of 1.0 means there will be no printout
of sectional force and critical load for
combined member in the output.
A value of 2.0 means there will be printout of
sectional force for combined member in the
output.
A value of 3.0 means there will be printout of
both sectional force and critical load for
combined member in the output. ***

HLINK Spacing of
longitudinal bars
measured to the
outer face
Longer dimension of the rectangular
confining hoop measured to its outer face. It
shall not exceed 300 mm as per Cl. 7.4.8. If
hlink value as provided in the input file does
not satisfy the clause the value will be
internally assumed as the default one. This
parameter is valid for rectangular column.
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 8A1.6 for
details.

* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.

** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination.
These commands are ignored for members forming physical member.

Section 8A1

8-28
*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:

1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many
sub-beams this parameter will combine them into one member. It
can also be used to combine members to form one continuous
beam spanning over more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or
elastic moments will be calculated at the column supports. At all
the intermediate nodes (if any) this calculation will be ignored.
Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle
to the beam. Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of
the combined member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load
Summary) for all active load cases during design.

Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is
issued.

The following lines should be satisfied during combination of
members:

1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if
any single span between two column supports of a continuous
beam are subdivided into several members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio,
alpha,
density and beta angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e. columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different
combined members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one
member is 299.

Section 8A1

8-29
Note:

Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will
only be available when all the members combined are successfully
designed in both flexure and shear.

ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and
when necessary) even if physical member has been formed.

The following lines show a standard example for design to be
performed in IS 13920.

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
..
MEMBER INCIDENCES
..
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
..
CONSTANTS
.
SUPPORTS
.
DEFINE 1893 LOAD
ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1
SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT
.
LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR
1893 LOAD X 1
LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR
1893 LOAD Z 1
LOAD 3 DL
MEMBER LOAD
UNI GY -5
LOAD 4 LL
Section 8A1

8-30
MEMBER LOAD
. UNI GY -3
LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL)
3 1.5 4 1.5
LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
PDELTA ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 5 TO 9
CODE IS13920
UNIT MMS NEWTON
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 20 ALL
MINMAIN 12 ALL
MAXMAIN 25 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
*** Unfactored gravity load on members 110 to 112 is 8 t/m
(DL+LL) i.e. 78.46 New/mm
EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112
** Members to be combined into one physical member
COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112

*** Plastic moment considered
PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112
DESIGN COLUMN
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FINISH

Section 8A1

8-31
8A1.6 Bar Combination
Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number
of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along
the length of the beam. Now two bar diameters can be specified to
calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section.
The syntax for bar combination is given below.

START BAR COMBINATION
END BAR COMBINATION

MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The
typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 2166.7 | 2166.7- 6500.0 | 6500.0- 8666.7 |
| mm | mm | mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 6-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 |
Ast Reqd| 2330.22 | 1029.90 | 582.55 |
Prov| 2376.79 | 1119.64 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-20 | 2-20 | 2-20 |
Ast Reqd| 1165.11 | 582.55 | 582.55 |
Prov| 1257.14 | 628.57 | 628.57 |
Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one
at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two
ends of each section.
Section 8A1

8-32
Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per
Clause 6.3.3

For Beam No. 1 and 2

Section Width b 250 mm
Depth D 500 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm
Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear Cover 25 mm
Bar Diameter 12 mm
Effective Depth d 469 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 4000 mm
Ast_Top_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 339.29 sq. mm

Section 8A1

8-33
Steps

Calculation of Simple Shear
Simple shear from
gravity load on span =
Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 15600N

Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided

Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,as =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 36768130.05 N

Hogging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,ah =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d *
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 54003057.45 N

Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,bs =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
= 54003057.45 N

Hogging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,bh =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 -
Ast_Top_B* fy / b * d * fck)
= 36768130.05 N

Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both
Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span

FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT

Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -10137.69104 N

Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 41337.69104 N

Section 8A1

8-34

FIG2: SWAY TO LEFT

Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 53402.14022 N

Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = - 22202.14022 N

Design Shear Force

Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = 11.56 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = 53402.14022 N

Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -6.44 N

Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = 41337.69104 N

For Beam No. 3

Section Width b 300 mm
Depth D 450 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm
Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear Cover 25 mm
Bar Diameter 12 mm
Effective Depth d 419 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 3000 mm
Ast_Top_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 226.19 sq. mm

Section 8A1

8-35

Calculation of Simple Shear
Simple shear from
gravity load on span =
Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 11700N

Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided

Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,as =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d *
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 48452983 N

Hogging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,ah =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d *
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
= 32940364.5 N

Sagging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,bs =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d *
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
= 32940364.5 N

Hogging Moment Of
Resistance of End A
Mu,bh =
0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 -
Ast_Top_B* fy / b * d * fck)
= 63326721.3 N

Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both
Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span

FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT

Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -40463.862 N

Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 63863.862 N

Section 8A1

8-36

Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 42444.3402 N

Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = -15144.34 N

Design Shear Force

Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl =
-10.31 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = 42444.3402 N

Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl =
-23.81 N

Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = 63863.862 N

8-37

Steel Design Per IS800

8B.1 Design Operations
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural
members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The
member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry
out a number of different design operations. These facilities may
be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the
design problem. The operations to perform a design are:

design.
selection.
values.
Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.

depending upon the design requirements. The entire ISI steel
section table is supported. Section 8B.13 describes the
specification of steel sections.
Section
8B
Section 8B

8-38
implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:800-1984)
for structural steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and
procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are
based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major
failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure
by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe the
salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the
stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the
most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight
criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability
and strength requirements and reports the critical loading
condition and the governing code criteria. It is generally assumed
that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like
provision of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange
buckling and web crippling.
8B.3 Allowable Stresses
The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon
the allowable stress design method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a
method for proportioning structural members using design loads
and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. It would not be
possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This
section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable
stresses specified by IS:800 and implemented in STAAD.
Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during the
discussion of various types of allowable stresses.

Section 8B

8-39
8B.3.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress

The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800
is described below.

The permissible stress in axial tension,
at
in MPa on the net
effective area of the sections shall not exceed

at
= 0.6 f
y

Where,

f
y
= minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

Compressive Stress

Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially
loaded compression members shall not exceed 0.6f
y
nor the
permissible stress
ac
calculated based on the following formula:
(Clause: 5.1.1)

ac
cc y
n
f f
n
cc
f
n
y
f
=

+
0 6
1
.
[( )
( )
]
/

Where,

ac
= Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa
f
y
= Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
f
cc
= Elastic critical stress in compression =
2
E/
2

E = Modulus of elasticity of steel, 2 X 10
5
Mpa
=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective
length to appropriate radius of gyration
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
Section 8B

8-40
8B.3.2 Bending Stress
The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is
calculated based on the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)

bt
or

bc
= 0.66 f
y

Where,

bt
= Bending stress in tension
bc
= Bending stress in compression
f
y
= Yield stress of steel, in MPa

For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of
maximum strength (z-z axis), the maximum bending compressive
stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective section shall
not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive
stress. The maximum permissible bending compressive stress shall be
obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)

6.2.3) : (Clause
] )
f
y
(
n
)
f
cb
(
n
[
1/n
f y f cb
0.66
bc
+
=

Where,

f
y
= Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
f
cb
= Elastic critical stress in bending, calculated by the
following formula:

cb f k X k Y
c
c
= +
1 2
2
1
[ ]

Section 8B

8-41
Where,

X Y
IT
r D
MP
y
r
y
a
= + 1
1
20 1
2
2
Y =
26.5x10
5
( / )

k
1
= a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or
breadth of flanges between points of effective lateral
restraint and depends on , the ratio of the total area of
both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the
corresponding area at the point of greatest bending
moment between such points of restraint.

k
2
= a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and
depends on , the ratio of the moment of inertia of the
compression flange alone to that of the sum of the moment
of the flanges each calculated about its own axis parallel to
the y-yaxis of the girder, at the point of maximum bending
moment.

1 = effective length of compression flange

r
y
= radius of gyration of the section about its axis of
minimum strength (y-y axis)

T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the
area of horizontal portion of flange divided by width.

D = overall depth of beam

c
1
,c
2
= respectively the lesser and greater distances from the
section neutral axis to the extreme fibres.
8B.3.3 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800.
For shear on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consist
of the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear
parallel to the flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total
flange area.
Section 8B

8-42
8B.3.4 Combined Stress
Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are
proportioned accordingly to section 7 of IS:800. All members
subject to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy
the equation of Section 7.1.1.(a) for intermediate points, and
equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points.

For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section
7.1.2. is required to be satisfied.

Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of
Section 7.1.3. information regarding occurrence of sidesway can
be provided through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. In the
absence of any user provided information, sidesway will be
assumed.
In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete
control of the design process through the use of design parameters.
Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with IS:800
are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section along with their default
values and applicable restrictions. Users should note that when the
TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction with this
code, allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ),
tension (FTY & FTZ), and allowable shear stress (FV) will be
printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in Mpa.
When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be
provided.
8B.5 Stability Requirements
Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked
against the appropriate maximum values. Section 3.7 of IS:800

Section 8B

8-43
summarizes the maximum slenderness ratios for different types of
members. In STAAD implementation of IS:800, appropriate
maximum slenderness ratio can be provided for each member. If
no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members
will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension
members will be checked against a maximum value of 400.
8B.6 Truss Members
As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only
axial forces. So in design no time is wasted in calculating bending
or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably.
Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing
or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than
as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
8B.7 Deflection Check
This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in
the CODE CHECK and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The
deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which
are described in Table 7B.1. Note that deflection is used in
addition to other strength and stability related criteria. The local
deflection calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
8B.8 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified
section is capable of satisfying applicable design code
requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:800 (1984)
requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections of the
members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections
may be specified using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION
command. If no sections are specified, the code checking is based
on forces and moments at the member ends.

Section 8B

8-44
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or
FAILed. In addition, the critical condition (applicable IS:800
clause no.), governing load case, location (distance from the start)
and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also
printed out.
select the most economical section, that is the lightest section,
which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section
selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as
originally specified by the user. Member selection may be
performed with all types of steel sections listed in Section 7B.13
and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties
are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to
sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be
performed on members whose cross sectional properties are
specified as PRISMATIC.

The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using
the parameters listed in Table 8B.1. It may be noted that the
parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member
depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided,
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to
three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section
being selected from each one.
8B.10 Member Selection By Optimization
Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized.
The optimization method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical
technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The user
may start without a specifically designated section. However, the
section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.)
must be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6).

Section 8B

8-45
The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and
corresponding force distributions. An optimum member size is
determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This
method requires substantial computer time and hence should be
used with caution.
result in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are

a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design
is performed

b) TABLE refers to the INDIAN steel section name which has
been checked against the steel code or has been selected.

c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed.
If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in
front of the member number.

d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the IS:800 code

e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable
stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or
less will mean the member has passed.
f) LOADING provides the load case number which governs the
design.

g) FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-
axis and moment in local z-axis respectively. Although
STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are
printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
Section 8B

8-46
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the
member to the section where design forces govern.
i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will
blockout part of the table and will print allowable bending
stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY &
FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and
allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is set
to 2.0 for all members parameter code values as shown in Fig
8B.1.

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (ISA )
***********************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 7 * | | | AX = 72.4 |
| * | ST ISLB400 | | --Z AY = 32.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 27.5 |
| IS-800 * =============================== ===|=== SY = 86.8 |
| * SZ = 965.3 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| RY = 3.1 |
|************* RZ = 16.3 |
| |
| 104.6( KN-METR) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM | IN NEWT MM|
|--------------- + -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 95.4 | FA = 84.8 |
| KL/R-Z= 18.4 + fa = 1.6 |
| UNL = 3000.0 | FCZ = 116.6 |
| C = 400.0 + FTZ = 165.0 |
| CMY = 0.85 | FCY = 165.0 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 | L3 fbz = 108.4 |
| NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.0 |
| DFF = 325.0 92.7 FV = 100.0 |
| dff = 4383.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE |
| (WITH LOAD NO.) |
| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE -23.7 61.3 0.0 0.0 104.6 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
| ====================================================== |
| PASS IS-7.1.2 0.667 1 |
| 9.62 T 0.0 -104.6 0.00 |
| |
| DEFLECTION * PASS |
| RATIO: 0.074 LOADING: 3 LOCATION: 0.67 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|

Section 8B

8-47
8B.12 Indian Steel Table
This is an important feature of the program since the program will
read section properties of a steel member directly from the latest
ISI steel tables (as published in ISI-800). These properties are
stored in memory corresponding to the section designation (e.g.
ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the properties are also used for
member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables,
shear deformation is always considered for these members.

Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete
may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.

Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections
available:

Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB).

All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are
designated in the ISI handbook., e.g. ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.

20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325

NOTE:
In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated
with an A on the end., e.g. ISHB400 A, etc.

1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A

Section 8B

8-48
Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLC and ISMC)

All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook.
Designation of the channels are per the scheme used by ISI.

10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125
12 TA ST ISLC300

Double Channels

specify a double channel, e.g. D ISJC125, D ISMC75 etc.

21 22 24 TA D ISLC225

Rolled Steel Angles

Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for
use in the STAAD implementation of ISI steel tables. The
following example with explanations will be helpful in
understanding the input procedure:

ISA 150 X 75 X 8

Angle symbol Thickness in mm

Long leg length in mm Short leg length in mm

At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes
for an angle section. The standard section has local axis system as
illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this manual. The standard angle is
specified as:

51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6

Section 8B

8-49
This specification has the local z-axis ( i.e., the minor axis
corresponding to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. Many
engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other
programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD
provides for this convention by accepting the command:

54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6 (RA denotes reverse angle)

Double Angles

of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD will

14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6

Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT)

All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are
specified in the ISI handbook. Following example illustrates the
designated method.

1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100
67 68 TA ST ISST250


To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP
section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided
for diameter. Following example will illustrate the designation.

Section 8B

8-50

10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
(Specifies a 213 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)

Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the

1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0ID 20.0
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20
in current length units)



Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.

TUB 400 200 12.5

Tube Symbol Thickness in mm

Height in mm Width in mm

Example:

15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808


6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 is a tube that has a height
of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5.

Section 8B

8-51

Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates)

All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as
listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with
explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.

I 1000 12 A 400 12

A F
B E
C D

A Plate and angle girder symbol.
B Web plate width in mm.
C Web plate thickness in mm.
D Flange angle (Flange angle key below):
E Flange plate width in mm.
F Flange plate thickness in mm.

SYMBOL ANGLE(A X B X t)(all in mm)

A 150X150X18
B 200X100X15
C 200X150X18
E 200X200X18

Section 8B

8-52
SINGLE JOIST WITH CHANNELS AND PLATES ON THE
FLANGES TO BE USED AS GIRDERS

All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used
as girders are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The
following example with explanations will be helpful in
understanding the input procedure.

IW 450 350 X 10 20

A E
B D
C

A Joist Designation: IW450=ISWB450

B Top flange channel designation:
350=ISMC350

C Constant (always X).

D Top flange plate thickness in mm.
NOTE: D is 0 for no plate.

E Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.

NOTE:

The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter
ISWB600 is more efficient.

Section 8B

8-53

Table 8B.1 Indian Steel Design - IS : 800 Parameters

Parameter
Name
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.
LY Member Length
ratio.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in local z-axis (major).
FYLD
250 MPA
(36.25 KSI)
Yield strength of steel.
UNL Member Length
Unsupported length for calculating allowable
bending stress.
UNF 1.0
Same as above provided as a fraction of actual
member length.
SSY 0.0
0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis.
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway and
calculated for no
sidesway
Cm value in local y & z axes
MAIN
180 (Comp.
Memb.)
Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for
compression members.
TMAIN
400 (Tension
Memb)
Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for
tension members.
TRACK 0.0
0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output. If there is
deflection check it will also print the
governing load case number for deflection
check whenever critical condition for
design is not DEFLECTION.
(see fig.8B.1)
Section 8B

8-54
Table 8B.1 Indian Steel Design - IS : 800 Parameters

Parameter
Name
RATIO 1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable
stresses.
BEAM 3.0
0.0 = design only for end moments and those at
locations specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate section forces at twelfth points
along the beam, design at each
intermediate location and report the critical
location where ratio is maximum.
PROFILE -
Search for the lightest section for the profile
mentioned.
DFF
None
(Mandatory for
deflection check)
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local
deflection
DJ1
Start Joint
of member
DJ2
End Joint of
member

NOTES:


Section 8B

8-55

1 2 and 3.
D
1
2 3
4
1
2 3

DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL



8B.13 Column With Lacings And Battens
For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections
at a distance and inter-connect them. The joining of element
sections is done by two ways:

a) Lacing and b) Batten

Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be
joined either by lacing or by batten plates having rivetted or
welded connection.

Table 8B.2 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or
batten design. These parameters will have to be provided in unit
NEW MMS along with parameters defined in Table 8B.1.
Section 8B

8-56

Table 8B.2 Indian Concrete Design IS800 Parameters
Parameter
Name
CTYPE 1 Type of joining
CTYPE = 1 implies single lacing with rivetted
connection
CTYPE = 2 implies double lacing with rivetted
connection
CTYPE = 3 implies single lacing with welded
connection
CTYPE = 4 implies double lacing with welded
connection
CTYPE = 5 implies batten with rivetted
connection
CTYPE = 6 implies batten with welded
connection
THETA 50 degree Angle of inclination of lacing bars. It should lie
between 40 degree and 70 degree.
DBL 20 mm Nominal diameter of rivet
FVB
100 N/mm
2
Allowable shear stress in rivet
FYB
300 N/mm
2

Allowable bearing stress in rivet
WMIN 6 mm Minimum thickness of weld
WSTR 108 N/mm
2
Allowable welding stress
EDIST 32 mm (Rivetted
Connection)
25 mm (Welded
Connection)
Edge Distance

Section 8B

8-57
Table 8B.2 Indian Concrete Design IS800 Parameters
Parameter
Name
DCFR
0.0 0.0 implies double channel back-to-back.
1.0 Implies double channel face-to-face.
This parameter is used when member
properties are defined through user provided
table using GENERAL option.
COG
0.0 mm Centre of gravity of the channel. This
parameter is used when member properties
are defined through user provided table using
GENERAL option.
SPA
0.0 mm Spacing between double channels. This
parameter is used when member properties
are defined through user provided table using
GENERAL option.

Section 8B

8-58

8-59


8C.1 General Comments
implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:802-1995
Part 1) for structural steel design for overhead transmission line
towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics
for member selection and code checking are based upon the
principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability
considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features
of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria
being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic
section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code
checking part of the program checks stability and strength
requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the
governing code criteria.
8C.2 Allowable Stresses
The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon
the allowable stress design method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a
appropriate material under service conditions.

This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses
specified by IS:802 and implemented in STAAD.
Section
8C
Section 8C

8-60
8C.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802
is described below.

The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in
various members, multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety
shall not exceed minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material.

Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension,
at
in MPa on the net
effective area of the sections shall not exceed

at
= f
y

Where,

f
y
= minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied
by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed the value given
by the formulae described below.

Condition 1: If
1
1
]
1
=
1
]
1
\
|
y
F
t
b
t
b 210
lim

C
C r / KL

Stress F
a
=
y
F
Cc
r / KL
2
1
1
2
N/mm
2

C
C r / KL >

Section 8C

8-61
Stress F
a
=
( )
2
2
/ r KL
E
N/mm
2

Condition 2: If
lim
t
b

t
b

y
F
378
when F
y is
the N/mm
2
formulae given in condition 1 shall be used substituting for F
y
the
value F
cr
given by:

F
cr
=
y
lim
F
t
b
t
b
677 . 0
677 . 1
1
1
1
1
]
1
'
|
'
|

Condition 3:
t
b
>
y
F
378
when F
y is
the N/mm
2
formulae given in
condition 1 shall be used substituting for F
y
the value F
cr
given by

F
cr
=
2
t
b
65550

In which C
C =
y
F
E 2

Where

F
a
= allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa
F
y
= minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm
2

Section 8C

8-62
r
KL
= largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment
of the member,

b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.

Note : The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel
shall not exceed 25.
8C.3 Stability Requirements
Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked
against the appropriate maximum values. Following are the default
values used in STAAD:

Compression Members:

Members
Slenderness
value
Leg Members, ground wire peak member and lower
members of cross arms in compression
120
Other members carrying computed stress 200
Redundant members and those carrying nominal
stresses
250

Section 8C

8-63
Slenderness ratios of compression members are determined as
follows:

If ELA number given in the input for any particular member is
such that condition for L/r ratio to fall within the specified range
is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of finding
slenderness ratio using K*L/r formula.

ELA NO.

Type of members

Value of KL/r
1 Leg sections or joint members bolted
at connections in both faces
L/r
2 Members with concentric loading at
both ends of the unsupported panel
with values of L/r up to and
including 120
L/r
3 Member with concentric loading at
one end and normal eccentricities at
the other end of the unsupported
panel for value of L/r up to and
including 120
30 + 0.75L/r
4 Members with normal framing
eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r
up to and including 120
60 + 0.5L/r
5 Member unrestrained against
rotation at both ends of the
unsupported panel for value of L/r
from 120 to 200
L/r
6 Members partially restrained against
rotation at one end of the
over 120 and up to and including 225
28.6 + 0.762L/r
7 Members partially restrained against
rotation at both ends of the
over 120 and up to and including 250
46.2 + 0.615L/r
Section 8C

8-64
Tension Members:
Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only,
shall not exceed 400.
8C.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement
As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different
tower members shall be as follows:

Minimum Thickness, mm
Members
Galvanized Painted
Leg Members, ground wire peak
member and lower members of
cross arms in compression

5 6
Other members

4 5
8C.5 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified
section is capable of satisfying applicable design code
requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:802 (1995)
requirements. Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized
for the code checking calculations.

The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or
FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case,
location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing
forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option calculation
steps are also printed.

Section 8C

8-65
8C.5.1 Design Steps
The following are the steps followed in member design.

Step 1

Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange
thicknesses) is checked against minimum allowable thickness,
depending upon whether the member is painted or galvanised.

Step 2

If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program
determines whether the member is under compression or tension
for the loadcase under consideration. Depending upon whether the
member is under tension or compression the slenderness ratio of
the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against
allowable slenderness ratio.

Step 3

If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable
stress is performed. Allowable axial and tensile stresses are
calculated. If the member is under tension and there is no user
defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is
calculated by the program itself (Refer Section 8C.10). Actual
axial stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress
to allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value, the
member has passed the check.

Step 4

Number of bolts required for the critical loadcase is calculated.
Section 8C

8-66
8C.6 Member Selection
select the most economical section, that is the lightest section,
which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section
selected will be of the same type (either angle or channel) as
originally specified by the user. Member selection may be
performed with all angle or channel sections and user provided
tables. Selection of members, whose properties are originally
provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in
the user provided table.

The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using
the parameters listed in Table 8B.1. It may be noted that the
parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member
depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided,
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to
three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section
being selected from each one.
8C.7 Member Selection by Optimization
Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized.
The optimization method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical
technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The
optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and
corresponding force distributions.

An optimum member size is determined through successive
analysis/design iterations. This method requires substantial
computer time and hence should be used with caution.

Section 8C

8-67
8C.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
----------------------

CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------

TYPE : GALVANISED

MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 5.0 MM

ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM

RESULT : PASS
Section 8C

8-68

CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------

VALUE OF L/r : 90.16

EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r

ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 105.08

ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00

RESULT : PASS

CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------

CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION

Cc : sqrt(2*3.141592*3.141592*E/fy) : 127.22

b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 150.0 - 10.0 - 11.0 : 129.0 MM

(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28

(b/t)cal : 12.90

(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc

ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy :
164.72 MPA

CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------

DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 250000.00 N

ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 250000.00 / 2552.0 : 97.96 MPA

RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------

BOLT DIA : 16 MM

SHEARING CAP : 20.11 KN

BEARING CAP : 38.40 KN

BOLT CAP : 20.11 KN

NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 13

Section 8C

8-69
8C.9 Parameter Table for IS 802
Table 8C.1 Indian Steel Design - IS 802 Parameters

Parameter
Name
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor
axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major
axis.
LY Member Length Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate
slenderness ratio.
FYLD 250 MPA Yield Strength of steel
MAIN 1.0 Type of member to find allowable Kl/r for
slenderness calculations for members.
1.0 = Leg, Ground wire peak and lower
members of cross arms in compression
(KL/r = 120)
2.0 = Members carrying computed stress
(KL/r = 200)
3.0 = Redundant members and members
carrying nominal stresses (KL/r = 250)
4.0 = Tension members (KL/r = 400)
10.0 = Do not perform KL/r check
Any value greater than 10.0 indicates user
defined allowable KL/r ratio. For this case KY
and KZ values are must to find actual KL/r
ratio of the member.
Section 8C

8-70

Parameter
Name
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output.
9.0 = Print design calculations along with
expanded output.
LEG 1.0 This parameter is meant for plain angles.
0.0 = indicates the angle is connected by
shorter leg
1.0 = indicates the angle is connected by
longer leg
ELA 1.0 This parameter indicates what type of end
conditions is to be used. Refer Section 8C.3.
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
CNSF 0.0 This parameter indicates whether user has
defined NSF or the program will calculate it.
0.0 = User has defined NSF
1.0 = Program has to calculate it
DANGLE 0.0 This parameter indicates how the pair of
angles are connected to each other. This is
required to find whether the angle is in single
or double shear and the net section factor.
0.0 = Double angle placed back to back and
connected to each side of a gusset plate
1.0 = Pair of angle placed back-to-back
connected by only one leg of each angle
to the same side of a gusset plate
DBL 12 mm Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of
bolts and net section factor.
FVB 218 MPA Allowable shear stress in bolt
FYB 436 MPA Allowable bearing stress in bolt

Section 8C

8-71

Parameter
Name
GUSSET 5 mm Thickness of gusset plate.
Minimum of the thicknesses of the gusset plate
and the leg is used for calculation of the
capacity of bolt in bearing
NHL 0.0 mm Deduction for holes.
Default value is one bolt width plus 1.5 mm. If
the area of holes cut by any straight, diagonal
or zigzag line across the member is different
from the default value, this parameter is to be
defined.

8C.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor
The procedure for calculating net section factor for angle section is
described below.

Single angle connected by only one leg

A
net
= A
1
+ A
2
x K
1

Where A
1
= net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
A
2
= gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
And K
1
=
A2 A1 3
A1 3
+ x
x

The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg
0.5x thickness of leg)

Section 8C

8-72
Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of
each angle to the same side of a gusset plate

A
net
= A
1
+ A
2
x K
1

Where A
1
= net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
A
2
= gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
And K
1
=
A2 A1 5
A1 5
+ x
x

The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg
0.5x thickness of leg)

Double angles placed back to back and connected to each side
of a gusset plate

A
net
= gross area deduction for holes
Net Section Factor

For angle section it is the ratio of the net effective area, A
net
to the
gross area.

For channel section net section factor is taken to be 1.0.

Section 8C

8-73
8C.11 Example Problem No. 28
A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading
conditions. Design some members as per IS-802 and show detailed
calculation steps for the critical loading condition.

Given: End Condition = Members with normal framing
eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported panel for
values of L/r up to and including 120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.

Section 8C

8-74

STAAD TRUSS
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4; 6 2.2 12 2.2;
7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4; 11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2;
13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4; 16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2;
18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -1.4 24 1.4; 21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2;
23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4; 26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2;
28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -1.4; 31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2;
33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -2.4 9 -2.4; 36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2;
38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6; 40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2;
42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2; 44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2;
47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27 -1.2; 49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2;
52 -7.2 27 1.2; 53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2;
56 -4.2 30 -1.2; 57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2;
60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13;
11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19 20; 18 20 12;
19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20 10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15 6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19 10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26; 50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25; 58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3 24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7 28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82 31 33;
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39 40; 90 40 32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29 39; 98 30 40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35; 105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37; 112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13; 119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20; 126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14; 133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19; 140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42; 147 2 41;
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41; 154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42; 161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50; 168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49; 175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47; 182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53; 189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54; 196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54; 203 42 56;
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51; 210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58; 217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58; 224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59; 231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240 15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247 39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41; 254 43 42;

Section 8C

8-75

255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155 156 -
159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231 232 251 -
252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05e+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5e-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
Section 8C

8-76

LY 2800 MEMB 28 LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH

Output of design result

Section 8C

8-77
----------------------

---------------------------

TYPE : PAINTED



RESULT : PASS

---------------------------


EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r



RESULT : PASS

---------------------------------

CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION

Cc : sqrt (2*3.141592*3.141592*E/fy) : 127.24

b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 13.5 : 168.5 MM

(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28

(b/t)cal : 9.36

(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc

ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1- 0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy :
195.15 MPA

--------------------------------

LOAD NO. : 1


ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742002.38 / 11952.0 : 145.75 MPA

RESULT : PASS
Section 8C

8-78
BOLTING
-------

BOLT DIA : 16 MM



BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN


Section 8C

8-79
----------------------
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED



RESULT : PASS

---------------------------

EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r



RESULT : PASS

---------------------------------

CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION

ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA

--------------------------------

LOAD NO. : 3


ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112909.27 / ( 2903.0*0.801 ) : 48.53 MPA

RESULT : PASS

BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM



BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN


********** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN ***********
Section 8C

8-80

8-81
Design Per Indian Cold Formed
Steel Code

8D.1 General
Provisions of IS:801-1975, including revisions dated May, 1988,
have been implemented. The program allows design of single
(non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear,
as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening
effects have been included as an option.
8D.2 Cross-Sectional Properties
The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting
one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section
Property Tables from IS:811-1987(Specification for cold formed
light gauge structural steel sections).

The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:

Channel with Lips
Channel without Lips
Angle without Lips
Z with Lips
Hat

Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of
the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section
designation symbol in the input file.
Section
8D
Design Per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
Section 8D

8-82
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties.
STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure
analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are
used in the design stage, as applicable.
8D.3 Design Procedure
The following two design modes are available:

1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied
load effects, in accordance with IS:801-1975. Code checking is
carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a
form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to
resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the
degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK
parameter.

2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel
shapes database (IS standard sections) for alternative members that
pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In
addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the
member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all
database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel,
angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth
restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the
program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it
passes the code check or not.

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance
with Clause 5.2.1.1. Cross-sectional properties and overall
slenderness of members are checked for compliance with

Section 8D

8-83

Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for
members in Compression
Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in
Compression
Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths.

The program will check member strength in accordance with
Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:

Members in tension

Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1

Members in bending and shear


a) 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs,
b) 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs
c) 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.

Members in compression


a) 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element,
b) 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
c) 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical
shapes of open cross section or intermittently fastened
singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having
Q = 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural
buckling,
Section 8D

8-84
d) 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical
shapes or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical
components of built-up shapes having Q < 1.0 which may
be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
e) 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.

Members in compression and bending


a) All clauses for members in compression

&

b) 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,

c) 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected
to torsional or torsional-flexural buckling

d) 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened
singly-symmetric components of built-up shapes having
Q=1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling

e) 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened
singly-symmetric components of built-up shapes having
Q<1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling.

Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided by
the user.

Section 8D

8-85
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying
values of design variables and selection of design options.

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
BEAM 1.0
When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the adequacy of
the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally
spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM
value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and
instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by
the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details. For
TRUSS members only start and end locations are designed.
CMZ 1.0
Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending z. See IS:801-
1975, 6.7. Used for Combined axial load and bending design.
Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CMY 0.85
Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending y. See IS:801-
1975, 6.7. Used for Combined axial load and bending design.
Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CWY 0.85
Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening
effect should be included in resistance computation. See
IS:801-1975, 6.1.1
Values: 0 effect should not be included
1 effect should be included
FLX 1
Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is
provided or is not necessary for the member. See IS:801-
1975, 6.6.1
Values:
0 Section not subject to torsional flexural buckling
1 Section subject to torsional flexural buckling
FU 450 MPa
(4588.72
kg/cm
2
)
Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units.
Section 8D

8-86
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
FYLD 353.04
MPa
(3600.0
kg/cm
2
)
Yield strength of steel in current units.
KX 1.0
Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction
and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified
large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting
for determining the capacity in axial compression.
KY 1.0
Effective length factor for overall buckling about the local Y-
axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from
0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any
user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression.
KZ 1.0
Effective length factor for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It
is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for
a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for
LX Member
length
Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current units of
length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely
prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large
value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
LY Member
length
Effective length for overall buckling in the local Y-axis. It is
input in the current units of length. Values can range from
0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to
any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
LZ Member
length
Effective length for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It is
input in the current units of length. Values can range from

Section 8D

8-87
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to
any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
MAIN 0
0 Check slenderness ratio
0 Do not check slenderness ratio
NSF 1.0
Net section factor for tension members

DMAX
2540.0
cm.
Maximum allowable depth. It is input in the current units of
length.
RATIO 1.0
Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses
TRACK
0 This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which
the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable
values are:

0 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and
PASS/FAIL status.
1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by
TRACK 1
2 - Prints member and material properties in addition to that
printed by TRACK 2.
TSA 1
Specifies whether webs of flexural members are adequately
stiffened to satisfy the requirements of IS:801-1975, 5.2.4.
Values:
0 Do not comply with 5.2.4
1 Comply with 5.2.4

Section 8D

8-88

Section 9
Japanese Codes

;alksdf;lkajf

9-1

Concrete Design Per AIJ

on the AIJ standard for structural calculation of Reinforced
Concrete Structures (1985 edition). Design for a member involves
calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the
member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties
and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the
details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross
section are also reported in the output.
designed.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

input:

Section
9A
Section 9A

9-2
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.

with 350mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not
Consideration
compression members. Slenderness effects result in additional
forces being exerted on the column over and above those obtained
from the elastic analysis. There are two options by which the
slenderness effects can be accommodated.

The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an
exact analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction
of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member.
The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from
an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then
evaluated.

The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from
the elastic analysis and design the column for the magnified
moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is equivalent to
the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary
moments.

STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the
above methods. To utilize the first method, the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the

Section 9A

9-3
input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this
automatically. The second method mentioned above is utilized by
providing the magnification factor as a concrete design parameter
(See the parameter MMAG in Table 9A.1). The column is designed
for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial
moments if the first method is used and for the axial load and
magnified biaxial moments if the second method is used.
9A.5 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. Program
considers 12 equally spaced sections of the beam member.
However this number can be redefined by NSECTION parameter.
All these sections are designed for flexure, shear and torsion for
all the load cases and print out the design results for most critical
load case.

Design for Flexure
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated
on the basis of section properties provided by the user. Program
first try to design the section for =0 and pt = balanced
reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the actual
moment program increases value for same pt and checks the
satisfactory conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this
procedure continues until reaches to 1.0 and then pt value is
increased keeping = 1.0. This procedure continues until pt
reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment
for pt = maximum value and = 1.0 is lower than the actual
moment the program gives message that the section fails.
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars
needed to design the section. It arranges the bar in layers as per
Section 9A

9-4
the requirements and recalculate the effective depth and redesign
the sections for this effective depth.

Please note,
Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not
considered in flexure design
MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into
consideration for flexure design.
STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice
and considering the fact that Japan is a high seismic zone area.

Design for Shear
Shear design of beam is done for Qy value. The update effective
depth is used for allowable shear stress calculation. Allowable
shear stress of concrete is automatically calculated from design
load type (permanent or temporary) and given density of concrete.
Program calculates required Bar size and spacing of stirrups. Pw is
calculated for design Bar size and spacing and all the necessary
checking is done.

For seismic load it is needed to increase shear force 1.5 times the
actual value and this can be done utilizing SMAG parameter.

Please note,

SMAG parameter can be used if its needed to increase the
Design Shear Force without changing Design Moment.
Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged
Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal
Weight Concrete is 2.3 kg/sq. cm

Section 9A

9-5


UNIT KG CM
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Design for Torsion
Torsion design for beam is optional. If TORSION parameter value
is 1.0, program design that beam for torsion. Program first checks
whether extra reinforcement is needed for torsion or not. If
additional reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is added to
flexure pt and additional Pw is added to shear design Pw.
9A.6 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment
and shear force. Both the ends of the members are designed for all
the load cases and the loading which produces largest amount of
reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0 or Track 1 is
used, design results will be printed for critical load only. But if
Track 2 is used user can get details design results of that member.
Pt needed for minimum axial force, maximum axial force,
maximum MZ, maximum MY among all the load cases for both the
ends will be printed. If MMAG parameter is used, the column
moments will be multiplied by that value. If SMAG parameter is
used, column shear force will be multiplied by that value.

Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular
sections. For rectangular and square sections Pt value is calculated
Section 9A

9-6
separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg value is
calculated for MZ and MY separately.

Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If BIAXIAL
parameter value 1.0, program will design the column for biaxial
moments. Otherwise column design is always uniaxial type.

Steps involved :

1) Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .

2) If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by
increasing Pt and checking allowable load for that known Pt
and known actual eccentricity of the column.

3) If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated
for given P and Pt and checking is done for allowable moment,
if allowable moment is less than the actual moment, program
increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column
design conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the
required Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.

4) If the column is in tension, design is done by considering
allowable tensile stress of steel only.

5) If biaxial design is requested program solve the following
interaction equation

0 . 1
Mzcap
Mz
Mycap
My

where, = 1.0+1.66666666 (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap &
1.0 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap represents section
capacity

6) If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt
and calculates Pcap, Mycap and Mzcap and solve the
interaction equation again and this process continues until the

Section 9A

9-7
eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum
limit.

7) If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that
interaction equation is satisfied ( if uniaxial design is
performed successfully ).

8) If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar
size and calculates no. of bars and details output is written.


UNIT KGS CMS
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modelled using finite
elements and analysed. The command specifications are in
accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical
Reference Manual.

to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement
and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement.
Section 9A

9-8
The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the
slab or wall. The following parameters are those applicable to slab
and wall design:

1. FYMAIN Yield stress for reinforcing steel - transverse and
longitudinal.
2. FC Concrete grade
3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to
the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on
both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. MINMAIN Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse
reinforcing bar

The other parameters shown in Table 9A.1 are not applicable to
slab or wall design.

LONG.
TRANS.
X
Y
Z
M
M
M
M
x
y
x
y

design being performed. Table 9A.1 contains a complete list of the
available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to
declare length and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before
performing the concrete design.

Section 9A

9-9

Table 9A.1 Japanese Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
FYMAIN 2200 Kg/cm
2
Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel, but user
should input this value as steel grade, like
SD345, SD295A, etc. program automatically
calculates yield stress value depending on
design load type (permanent or temporary).
FYSEC 2000 Kg/cm
2
Same as FYMAIN except this is for secondary
steel.
FC 210 Kg/cm
2
Compressive Strength of Concrete.
CL 3.0 cm Clear cover for Beam.
CLS 4.0 cm Clear side cover for Column.
MAXMAIN 41.0 cm Maximum main reinforcement bar size
MAXSEC 41.0 cm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam. (Note:
Both SFACE & EFACE are input as positive
numbers).
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral.
MMAG 1.0 Design moment magnification factor
SMAG 1.0 Design shear magnification factor
LONG 0.0 Value to define design load type
0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
BIAXIAL 0.0 Value to define biaxial or uniaxial design type for
Column
0 = uniaxial design only
1 = design for biaxial moments
TORSION 0.0 Value to request for torsion design for beam
0 = torsion design not needed
1 = torsion design needed
Section 9A

9-10
Table 9A.1 Japanese Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This value defaults
PROPERTIES.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value defaults
to YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
considered in finding critical moments for beam
design.
0.0 = Critical section design results.
1.0 = Five section design results & design
forces.
2.0 = 12 section design results & design forces.
COLUMN DESIGN:
1.0 = Detail design results for critical load case
only.
2.0 = Design results for minimum P, maximum
P, maximum MZ and maximum MY
among all load cases for both ends.

9-11

Steel Design Per AIJ

9B.1 General
implementation of the Architectural Institute of Japan (AIJ)
specifications for structural steel design (1986 edition) in STAAD.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the
principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities
are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two
major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and
failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe
the salient features of the design approach.

exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most
economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight
slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are
recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel
design:

Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
Specify the design parameter values if different from the
default values.
selection.
Section
9B
Section 9B

9-12
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in
using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular
stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic
analysis may also be performed and the results combined with
static analysis results.
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel
shapes, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used.
The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may
also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.
9B.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library
These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these
for these members during the analysis. An example of member
section.

Section 9B

9-13
section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical
user interface.


I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:

Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the
decimal point should be excluded.

Example : 1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9

H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:

Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal
point should be excluded.

Example: 1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12

I 250 X 125 X 10
Web thickness (mm)
Nominal width of flange (mm)
Section-type (I)
Nominal height (mm)
H 600 X 200 X 11
Web thickness (mm)
Section-type (H)
Nominal height (mm)
Section 9B

9-14
T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:

Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the
decimal point should be excluded

Example: 20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19

Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.

Example: 25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8

Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in
between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section
name is used to specify a double channel.

17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10
45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0

In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back to back
double channel C300X90X10 with no spacing in between.
T 250 X 16
Flange thickness (mm)
Section-type (T)
C 300 X 90 X 10
Web thickness (mm)
Section-type (C)
Nominal height (mm)

Section 9B

9-15
Members 45 to 76 are a double channel C250X90X11 with a
spacing of 2 length units.

Angles
standard angle specification is as follows.

The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by
the length of the legs and then the thickness of the leg, all in
millimetres. The word ST signifies that the section is a STandard
angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the
local YY axis specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the User's
Manual.

Example: 1 4 TA ST L150X90X9

If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis
specified in Chapter 2 of the User's Manual, the word RA (Reverse
Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.

7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9

Double angles
Short leg back to back and long leg back to back double angles
may be specified by using the words SD or LD in front of the
angle size. In the case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will
serve the purpose. The spacing between the angles may be
specified by using the word SP after the angle size followed by the
value of the spacing.
L 125 X 90 X 10
Thickness (mm)
Length of shorter side (mm)
Section-type (L)
Length of longer side (mm)
Section 9B

9-16

8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0
36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0

The first example indicates a short legs back to back double angle
comprised of 100X65X7 angles separated by 2 length units. The
latter is a long legs back to back double angle comprised of
300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.

Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,


is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units
and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no
member selection can be performed on TUBE sections.

Pipes (Circular Hollow sections)
Circular hollow sections may be provided by specifying the word
PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section.
For example,

specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and an
inside diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member
selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.

Section 9B

9-17

Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
* PIPE
FINISH
Section 9B

9-18
As mentioned before, member design and code checking in
STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a
appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure
of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member
under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable
tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on
several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness
factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained
here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.

Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes,
CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as
member property and STAAD will automatically adopt the design
procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested.
STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can
be used for member property.

Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the
allowable stresses as required by AIJ specifications. The design
procedure consist of following three steps.

1) Calculation of sectional properties
Program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ),
Moment of Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-
built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using
appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration
needed for bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( Ii
)and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses
following formula:

Section 9B

9-19

Ai
Ii
i =

Please note, that the above mentioned procedure for
calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape and Channel
sections.

2) Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following
methods:

i) Axial Stress :
Actual tensile stresses ( FT ) = Force / ( A NSF ),
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( FC ) = Force / A

Allowable tensile stress ( ft ) = F / 1.5 (For Permanent
Case)
= F ( For Temporary Case )

Allowable compressive stress
( ) { } = when / F x / x 4 . 1 ) fc (
2

( ) > = when / / F x 77 . 2
2

= fc 1.5 (For Temporary Case )
where, ) xF 6 /(. E
2
= =F) , =3 / 2 + 2 / 3 ( / )
2

ii) Bending Stress :
Actual bending stress for My for compression
( Fbcy) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz

Actual bending stress for My for tension
( Fbty) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
( Fbtz) = Mz / Zcz

Section 9B

9-20
where, Zcy , Zcz are section modulus for compression and
Zty, Ztz are section modulus for tension

Allowable bending stress for My
( fbcy) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz
( fbcz) = { 1-.4 (lb / i )
2
/ (C
2
)}ft max
= 900/ ( lb h / Af )
For Temporary case, fbcz = 1.5 (fbcz for Permanent
Case)
where, C = 1.75 -1.05(M2/M1)+0.3(M2/M1)
2

Allowable bending stress for My ( fbty) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz ( fbtz) = fbcz

iii) Shear Stress
Actual shear stresses are calculated by following formula :
qy = Qy / Aww,
Where, Aww = web shear area = product of depth and web
thickness
qz = Qz / Aff ,
Where, Aff = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange
areas
Allowable shear stress ( fs ) = Fs / 1.5 , Fs = F / 3

3) Checking design requirements :
User provided RATIO value ( default 1.0 ) is used for
checking design requirements

The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ
specifications. For all the conditions calculated value should not
be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value
exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that the section fails.

Conditions:
i) Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii) Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii) Combined compression &
bending ratio = FC/fc+Fbz/fbz+Fby/fby

Section 9B

9-21
iv) Combined compression &
bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty-FC) / ft
v) Combined tension & bending ratio = FT/ft +Fbz/fbz+Fby/fby
vi) Combined tension & bending ratio = (Fbcz+Fbcy-FT) / fbcz
vii) Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii) Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs

New Output Format ( TRACK -- 3 )
One new output format has been introduced which provides details
step by step information of Steel Design for guiding load case
only. If Section command is used before Parameter command this
output will provide details information for all the sections
specified by Section Command.

Please note, that this output format is available only when Beam
parameter value is 0 and Track parameter value is 3. If section
command is not used design information will be printed for two
ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design
information will be printed.

Example:

SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL
PARAMETER
CODE JAPAN
BEAM 0.0 ALL
TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 to 4
TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 to 8
TRACK 3 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1)
of the AIJ code. In members with axial tension, the tensile load
must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension
capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member
Section 9B

9-22
area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member
based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of
1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see
Table 8B.1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking.

according to the procedure of section 5.1 (3). Compressive
resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section
(Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by
modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. In the absence
of user provided values for effective length, the actual member
length will be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the
permissible values specified in Chapter 11 of the AIJ code.

Allowable stress for Bending
The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are
dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness
of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL,
defaults to member length) etc. The allowable stresses in bending
(compressive and tensile) are calculated as per the criteria of
Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.

Allowable stress for Shear
Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc.
The allowable stresses in shear are computed according to Clause
5.1 (2) of the code.
locations of the member for all modelled loading situations.
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are checked using
the criteria of clause 6.2. For members with axial compression and
bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.

Section 9B

9-23
through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 9B.1 of this
chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the
engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been
conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter
values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical
structure.

Table 9B.1 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
minor axis.
major axis.
LY Member
Length
ratio.
LZ Member
Length
Same as above except in z-axis
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in Megapascal.
UNL Member
Length
Unsupported length for calculating allowable
bending stress.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction of
actual member length.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = check for slenderness
1.0 = suppress slenderness check
Section 9B

9-24
Table 9B.1 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Parameter
Name
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for member.
TMP 0
(Permanent
Load)
0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable
stresses.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments or those at
locations specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth points
along the beam, and use the maximum
Mz location for design.
DFF None
(Mandatory for
deflection
check)
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local
deflection
DJ1 Start Joint
of member
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation
of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of
member

NOTE:

Section 9B

9-25

1, 2 and 3.
D
1
2 3
4
1
2 3

DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL

9B.8 Code Checking
section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces
transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is
checked per the AIJ requirements.

zero (default), design will be based on the forces at the start and
end joints of the member. The code checking output labels the
members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Section 9B

9-26
based on the forces and moments obtained from the most recent
analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that
specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a
channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members
whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be
limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be
performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.


UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE JAPAN
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
SELECT ALL

Section 10
American Aluminum
Code

10-1

Design Per American Aluminum Code

10.1 General
STAAD is currently equipped with the facilities to perform design
based on the specifications for Aluminum Structures. The
requirements of the Allowable Stress Design, Sixth edition,
October 1994, have been implemented.

The various issues related to the implementation of this code in
STAAD are explained below.
10.2 Member Properties
In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure
must have their properties specified from Section VI of the above-
mentioned manual. The section names are mentioned in Tables 5
through 28 of that manual. All of those tables except Table 10
(Wing Channels) and Table 20 (Bulb Angles) are available in
STAAD.

Described below is the command specification for various
sections:

Standard single section

memb-list TA ST section-name

Section
10
Section 10

10-2

Example

1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PipeX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RectX.500Wall

Double channel back-to-back

memb-list TA BACK section-name SPACING value

Example

3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5
5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75

Double channel front-to-front

memb-list TA FRONT section-name SPACING value

Example

2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0
4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5

Section 10

10-3

Double angle long leg back-to-back

memb-list TA LD section-name SPACING value

Example

14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5

Double angle short leg back-to-back

memb-list TA SD section-name SPACING value

Example

12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0

10.3 Design Procedure
The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1,
4.2 and 4.4 on pages I-A-41 and I-A-42 of the Aluminum code.
The allowable stresses for the various sections are computed
according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1 through 3.4.21
on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40. The adequacy of the member is
checked by calculating the value of the left-hand side of equations
4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2, 4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand
side value is termed as RATIO. If the highest RATIO among these
equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0, the member is
declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has
FAILed the design requirements.

Section 10

10-4
The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently
not done.
10.4 Design Parameters
The following are the parameters for specifying the values for
variables associated with the design.

Table 10.1 Aluminum Design Parameters
Name Value
ALLOY 34 This variable can take on a value from 1 through 40.
The default value represents the alloy 6061-T6. See
Table 10A.2 in the following pages for a list of values
for this parameter and the alloy they represent.
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the Aluminum
specifications provides information on the properties
of the various alloys.
PRODUCT 1
This variable can take on a value from 1 through 4.
They represent:

1 - All 2 - Extrusions
3 - Drawn Tube 4 - Pipe

The default value stands for All. The PRODUCT
parameter finds mention in Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B
of the Aluminum specifications.
ALCLAD 0
This variable can take on a value of either 0 or 1.

0 - Material used in the section is not an Alclad.
1 - Material used in the section is an Alclad.
WELD 0
In Table 3.4-2 in Section I-A of the Aluminum
specifications, it is mentioned that the value of
coefficients Kt and Kc are dependent upon whether
or not, the location of the section where design is
done is within 1.0 inch of a weld. The WELD
parameter is used in STAAD for this purpose. The
values that can be assigned to this parameter are:

0 - Region is farther than 1.0in from a weld
1 - Region is within 1.0in from a weld

Section 10

10-5
Name Value
STRUCTURE 1
In Table 3.4-1 in Section I-A of the Aluminum
specifications, it is mentioned that the value of
coefficients nu, ny and na are dependent upon
whether the structure being designed is a building or
a bridge. Users may convey this information to
STAAD using the parameter STRUCTURE. The
values that can be assigned to this parameter are:

1 - Buildings and similar type structures
2 - Bridges and similar type structures
DMAX 1000 in. Maximum depth permissible for the section during
member selection. This value must be provided in
the current units.
DMIN 0.0 in Minimum depth required for the section during
member selection. This value must be provided in
the current units.
UNL Member
length
Distance between points where the compression
flange is braced against buckling or twisting. This
value must be provided in the current units. This
value is used to compute the allowable stress in
bending compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling in
the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely
determining the allowable stress in axial
compression.
LY Member
length
Effective length for overall column buckling in the
local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length.
compression.
Section 10

10-6
Name Value
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling in
the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
compression.
LZ Member
length
Effective length for overall column buckling in the
local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length.
compression.
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining
the allowable stress in axial compression. See
Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the Aluminum
specifications for details.
LT Member
length
Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current
units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
column completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining
the allowable stress in axial compression. See
Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the Aluminum
specifications for details.
STIFF Member
length
Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear
stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is input in the
current units of length. See section 3.4.21 on page I-
A-40 of the Aluminum specifications for information
regarding this parameter.

Section 10

10-7
Name Value
SSY 0.0
Factor that indicates whether or not the structure is
subjected to sidesway along the local Y axis of the
member. The values are:

0 - Sidesway is present along the local Y-axis of
the member
1 - There is no sidesway along the local Y-axis of
the member.
The sidesway condition is used to determine the
value of Cm explained in Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41
SSZ 0.0
Factor that indicates whether or not the structure is
subjected to sidesway along the local Z axis of the
member. The values are:

0 - Sidesway is present along the local Z-axis of the
member
1 - There is no sidesway along the local Z-axis of
the member.
The sidesway condition is used to determine the
value of Cm explained in Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41
TRACK 2
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in
which the design output is reported in the output file.
The allowable values are:

1 - Prints only the member number, section name,
ratio, and PASS/FAIL status.
2 - Prints the design summary in addition to that
printed by TRACK 1
3 - Prints the member properties and alloy
properties in addition to that printed by
TRACK 2.
4 - Prints the values of variables used in design in
addition to that printed by TRACK 3.
Section 10

10-8
Name Value
BEAM 0.0 If this parameter is set to 1.0, the adequacy of the
member is determined by checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations along the length of the
member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location
check is not conducted, and instead, checking is
done only at the locations specified by the SECTION
command (See STAAD manual for details). If neither
the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION command is
specified, STAAD will terminate the run and ask the
user to provide one of those 2 commands. This rule
is not enforced for TRUSS members.
10.5 Code Checking
The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially
specified member properties are adequate to carry the forces
transmitted to the member due to the loads on the structure. Code
checking is done at the locations specified by either the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter described above.

It is done with the aid of the command CHECK CODE
described in the main STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Examples Manual
for STAAD provides an example on the usage of the CHECK
CODE command.
10.6 Member Selection
The member selection process involves the determination of the
least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure
channel selected for it. It is done with the aid of the command
SELECT MEMBER described in the main STAAD Technical

Section 10

10-9
Reference Manual. Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and
Examples Manual for STAAD provides an example on the usage of
the SELECT MEMBER command.

Sample input data for Aluminum Design

PARAMETER
CODE ALUMIMUM
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

Section 10

10-10
Table 10.2 - ALLOY PARAMETER :

Values and Corresponding Names

1 1100-H12
2 1100-H14
3 2014-T6
4 2014-T6510
5 2014-T6511
6 2014-T651
7 3003-H12
8 3003-H14
9 3003-H16
10 3003-H18
11 3004-H32
12 3004-H34
13 3004-H36
14 3004-H38
15 5005-H12
16 5005-H14
17 5005-H32
18 5005-H34
19 5050-H32
20 5050-H34
21 5052-H32
22 5052-H34
23 5083-H111
24 5086-H111
25 5086-H116
26 5086-H32
27 5086-H34
28 5454-H111
29 5454-H112
30 5456-H111
31 5456-H112
32 6005-T5
33 6105-T5

Section 10

10-11
34 6061-T6
35 6061-T6510
36 6061-T6511
37 6061-T651
38 6063-T5
39 6063-T6
40 6351-T5

Section 10

10-12

Section 11
American Transmission
Tower Code

11-1

Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports

11.1 General Comments
This document presents some general statements regarding the
implementation of the Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and
Reports on Engineering Practice No. 52 Guide for Design of
Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition. The design
philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code
checking is based upon the principles of allowable stress design.
Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing
and failure by stability considerations.

The following sections describe the salient features regarding the
process of calculation of the relevant allowable stresses and the
stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the
most economical section is selected based on the least weight
slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness
requirements and the width-thickness requirements. It is generally
assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements
like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange
buckling, web crippling, etc. It general, it may be noted that the
concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE
CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based
design. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basic
concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please
refer to Section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for
detailed information on this topic. This document specifically
addresses the implementation of steel design based on ASCE Pub.
52.
Section
11
Steel Design Per ASCE Manuals And Reports
Section 11

11-2
11.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)
The member design and code checking in the STAAD
implementation of ASCE (Pub. 52) is based upon the allowable
stress design method. Appropriate sections of this publication are
referenced below.

Allowable Axial Tensile Stress
Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the
procedure described in section 4.10. The NSF parameter (Table
1.1) may be used if the net section area needs to be used.

Allowable Axial Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the
procedures of section 4.6 through 4.9. For angle members under
compression, the procedure of sections 4.7 and 4.8 have been
implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for column
buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user
may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY,
LZ and/or KX, KY, KZ parameters (Table 1.1).

Allowable Bending Compressive Stress
Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the
major axis and minor axis are based on the procedures of section
4.14. Procedures outlined in sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have
been implemented.

Allowable Bending Tensile Stress
Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major
and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14.2.

Allowable Shear Stress
Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure
outlined in section 4.15 of the ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of

Section 11

11-3
section 4.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section
4.15.1 is followed for all other sections.

Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail
status
These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for
Axial Compression and Bending, Equation 4.13-1 for Axial
Tension and Bending, Clause 4.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and
Clause 4.15 for Shear.
Design per ASCE (Pub. 52) must be initiated by using the
command CODE ASCE. This command should be the first
command after the PARAMETER statement. Other applicable
parameters are summarized in Table 1.1. These parameters may be
used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs.
frequently used numbers for conventional design.
11.4 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available in
the ASCE Pub. 52 implementation. For general information on
these options, refer to section 3 of the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual. For information on specification of these
commands, refer to section 6.
Section 11

11-4
11.5 Parameter Definition Table
Table 11.1 - Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (PUB. 52) Based Design

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling
about the Y-axis (minor axis)
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling
about the Z-axis (major axis)
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping restraint
(clause 4.14.4, pg 36)
LY Member
Length
Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling
about the Y-axis (minor axis)
LZ Member
Length
Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling
about the Z-axis (major axis)
LT Member
Length
Effective length for warping.
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
UNL Member
Length
Unsupported length of member for calculation of
allowable bending stress
UNF 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the
member length
TRACK 0.0
0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
DMAX 45.0 in.
Maximum allowable depth for member selection
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member selection
RATIO 1.0
Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point for
pass/fail status. A value below this quantity
indicates PASS while a value greater than this
quantity indicates FAILURE.
BEAM 0.0
0.0 = Perform design using the section locations
specified according to the SECTION
command
1.0 = Perform design at the ends and eleven
intermediate sections of the beam

Section 11

11-5

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
MAIN 2
Parameter that indicates the member type for the purp
of calculating the KL/R ratio
(SEE CLAUSE 4.4, PAGE 25)

= 10 : DO NOT PERFORM THE KL/R CHECK
= 1 : LEG MEMBER KL/R <= 150
= 2 : COMPRESSION MEMBER KL/R <= 200
= 3 : TENSION MEMBER KL/R <= 500
= 4 : HANGAR MEMBERS KL/R <= 375
(Clause 4C.4, page 43)
= 5 : REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL/R <= 250

ELA 4
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used
From among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7 to determine t
the KL/R ratio.

ELA=1 : EQN.4.7-4, Page 26
(VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY)
ELA=2 : EQN.4.7-5, Page 27
ELA=3 : EQN.4.7-6, Page 27
ELA=4 : EQN.4.7-7, Page 27
ELB 1
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used
From among Equations. 4.7-8 thru 4.7-10 to
determine the KL/R ratio.

ELB=1 : EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-12, Page 28
ELB=2 : EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-13, Page 28
ELB=3 : EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-14,Page28
LEG 0.0
This parameter is meant for plain angles.

0.0 = indicates that the angle is connected by both
legs and allowable stress in axial tension is
1.0FYLD.
1.0 = indicates that the angle is connected only by
the shorter leg and allowable tensile stress is
computed per clause 4.10.2 as 0.9FYLD.
2.0 = indicates that the angle is connected by the
longer leg.
DBL 0.75 in.
Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts
required and the net section factor.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
Section 11

11-6

Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
NHL

0
Number of bolt holes on the cross section that
should be used to determine the net section factor for
tension capacity.

Notes:

All values must be provided in the current unit system.

Section 12
American Steel Design
Per A.P.I. Code

12-1

Steel Design Per A.P.I.

12.1 Design Operations
structural members as individual components of an analyzed
requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a
design are:

design;
selection;
values; and
Specify design parameters to carry out punching shear checks.

depending upon the design requirements, but care should be taken
when coupled with manipulation of the punching shear LEG
parameter.

The basic process is:-
a. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading and analysis.
b. Define the API code parameters with LEG 1.0.
c. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry
file and give preliminary design results.
d. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary.
Section
12
Section 12

12-2
e. Reset the LEG parameter to 2.0 and re-run the analysis to read
the modified Geometry file for the final design results.
12.2 Allowables per API Code
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the
allowable stresses as defined by the American Petroleum Institute
(API-RP2A) Code. The 20th edition of API Code, as published in
1993, is used as the basis of this design (except for tension stress).
12.2.1 Tension Stress
Allowable tension stresses, as calculated in STAAD, are based on
the API Code, clause (3.2.1-1).

Allowable tension stress on the net section

F
t
= 0.60F
y

12.2.2 Shear Stress
Beam Shear Stress
Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to
(3.2.4-2):

F
v
= 0.4 F
y

The maximum applied beam shear stress is:

f
v
= V / 0.5 A (3.2.4-1)

Torsional Shear Stress
Allowable torsional shear stress

F
vt
= 0.4 F
y
(3.2.4-4)

Section 12

12-3

F
vt
is the maximum torsional shear stress per (3.2.4-3).
12.3 Stress due to Compression
The allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially
loaded compression members is calculated based on the formula
3.2.2-1 in the API Code, when the largest effective slenderness
ratio
r
Kl
is less than C
c
=
y
F
E
2
2 . If
r
Kl
exceeds C
c
the
allowable compressive stress is increased as per formula (3.2.2-2)
of the Code.

For
t
D
> 60 the lesser of F
xe
or F
xc
are substituted for F
xy
.
F
xe
= the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical
elastic buckling coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F
xc
= the inelastic local buckling stress, (3.2.2-4)
12.4 Bending Stress
The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a
symmetrical member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given
in Section 3.2.3 is:

a) F
b
= 0.75 F
y

provided
t
D

y
F
1500
(Imperial Units)

b) F
b
=
Et
D F
y
74 . 1 84 . 0 F
y

Section 12

12-4
where
y
F
1500
<
t
D
<
y
F
3000
(Imperial Units)

c) F
b
=
Et
D F
y
58 . 0 72 . 0 F
y

where
y
F
3000
<
t
D
300 (Imperial Units)
12.5 Combined Compression and Bending
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses
are proportioned to satisfy API formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when
a
a
F
f
is greater than 0.15, otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It
should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if
a
a
F
f
exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second
3.3.1-1/2.
The program contains a large number of parameter names which
are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter
names, with their default values, are listed in Table 12.1. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the
program. (Also see section 5.44.1).

the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of
these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model
the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k
value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real

Section 12

12-5
structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program
can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section
5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set
to 1.0.

Note: The parameter names DMAX and DMIN are only used for
member selection.

Table 12.1- American (API) Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis.
Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis.
Usually, this is major axis.
LY Member
Length
Length in local Y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio.
LZ Member
Length
Length in local Z-axis to calculate slenderness ratio.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel.
UNL Member
Length
Unsupported length for calculating allowable bending
stress
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction of actual
member length
CB 1.0 Cb value as used in Section 1.5 of AISC
0.0 = Cb value to be calculated
Any other value will mean the value to be used in
design
MAIN 0.0 1.0 = Main member
2.0 = Secondary member
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
Section 12

12-6
Table 12.1- American (API) Steel Design Parameters
Parameter
Name
Default
Value
Description
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis
CMY
CMZ
0.85 for
sidesway*
and
calculated for
no sidesway
Cm value in local y & z axes

TRACK 0.0
1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses
100.0 = Suppress all checks except punching shear

DMAX 0.0 Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 Minimum allowable depth
RATIO Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses
WELD 1 for closed
sections
2 for open
sections
Weld type, as explained in section 3.1.1.
1 = Welding is one side only except for wide flange
or tee sections, where the web is always
assumed to be welded on both sides.
2 = Welding is both sides. For closed sections like
pipe or tube, the welding will be only on one
side.
BEAM 1.0
0.0 = design only for end moments or
those at locations specified by the SECTION
command.
= calculate moments at twelfth points along the
beam, and use the maximum Mz location for
design.
WMIN 1.16 in. Minimum thickness
WSTR 0.4 X FLYD Allowable welding stress
LEG 1.0
2.0
To write out external parameters file.
To read in the external parameters file.

Section 12

12-7
12.7 Code Checking
section properties of the members are adequate as per API. Code
checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections
of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the
start and end forces for code checking.

whether the members have passed or failed the checks, the critical
condition of API code (like any of the API specifications for
compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the ratio of the
other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the
location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the
member) where the critical condition occurs.

Section 2.2, American Steel Design, of the Technical Reference
manual.
12.8 Member Selection
select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section which
also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which

Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel
sections.

Section 12

12-8
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a
user created table will be limited to sections in the user table.

Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section
properties are input as prismatic.
12.9 Truss Members
As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only
axial force. So in design, no time is wasted calculating the
allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time
considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an
analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a
truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both
ends pinned.
12.10 Punching Shear
For tubular members, punching shear may be checked in
accordance with the American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 2A
20th Edition Section 4. The parameter PUNCH is used to identify
joint types for each end of the member where the punching shear
check is required. The PUNCH parameter is only read in from the
external geometry file. The external geometry file is described in
section 12.13. The PUNCH parameter is not specified within the
STAAD input file (the file with the .std extension).

Type of Joint and Geometry Req. Value of Parameter
PUNCH

K (overlap) 1.0
K (gap) 2.0
T & Y 3.0
CROSS 4.0
CROSS (with/diaphragms) 5.0

Section 12

12-9
Note: A value representing joint type and geometry must be
provided for parameter PUNCH, in the external file. On the first
run where no external table is present, LEG must equal 1.0.
12.11 Generation of the Geometry File
Automatic selection of the chord and brace members are performed
with the parameter LEG 1.0.

Two tubular members are used by the program to identify the
chord member. The chord members must be collinear (5 degree
tolerance).

The chord member must have a greater diameter and thickness
than the brace member being considered.

The punching shear check is performed on the joint treating it as a
T/Y joint. The yield stress of the brace is used. In the 50%
strength check the brace and chord yield are assumed to be the
same.

The major moment axis Mz is taken as In Plane Bending (IPB).
To change this, the parameter SWAP 1 should be used in the
external geometry file.

Note: The in-plane/out-of-plane correspondence can be set by
using the BETA angle.

If the punching shear cannot be performed at the joint for the
member being considered, a message is written to the output file
<filename>.ANL.

If a punching shear check is performed with the parameter LEG
1.0 used, then the geometry data used to perform the check is
written to the default external output file APIPUN.

The default external output/input file name can be changed by
using the command line:-
Section 12

12-10
CODE API <filename>.

This external output data file can be edited and used as an external
input file to re-perform the check using the parameter PUNCH 1.0
to 5.0.

This external input file allows can/stub geometry data to be
specified and chords to be assigned geometry where they could not
be identified in the Automatic selection.

The parameter LEG 2.0 must be used to read an external input file
where the default name is APIPUN.

The yield strength of the brace is used in the punching shear
check. This can be changed in the external geometry file. The
user should ensure that the correct cord member has been selected
for the check.
12.12 Chord Selection and Q
f
Parameter
Q
f
is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal
stress in the chord. When calculating Q
f
for the joints, the
moments used in the chord stress calculation will be from the
computer node results and not the representative moments
underneath the brace. If the moment varies significantly along the
chord, it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the
middle of the brace foot print. The tests reported in Reference I
1

were performed with a constant moment along the chord. Thus for
a local joint check, the local chord moment (under the brace)
should be used.

STAAD calculates Q
f
based on the moment at the chord member.
The chord member can be selected automatically by initial
screening by the program (based on geometry and independent of
loading) or specified by the user in the External file.

1
Ref I: Boone, TJ, Yura, JA and Hoadley, PW, Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints Chord
Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984

Section 12

12-11

In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5
degree tolerance) are used to identify the chord. The chord is then
selected from one of the two members based on the larger diameter
then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints
the first member modeled will be selected as the chord.

The user should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the
program or the user is representative of the local chord moment for
the brace in question.
12.13 External Geometry File
An example of the external geometry file is shown below:

BRACE CHORD PUNCH D T d T GAP FYLD THETAT TW SWAP
209 211 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00 0.000 0
209 210 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00 0.000 0
212 202 3 17.992 0.787 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00 0.000 0

The parameters used in the external file are defined as follows:

Table 12.2 External File
Parameter Description
PUNCH Parameter for punching shear (See Section
12.10)
BRACE Member number of brace
CHORD Member number of chord
D Chord Diameter in inches
T Chord Thickness in inches
d Brace Diameter in inches
T Brace Thickness in inches
GAP Gap in inches (must be negative for overlap
K-joint)
FYLD Local yield strength used for joint in KIPS
THETAT Angle of through brace in overlap K-joint in
Section 12

12-12
Table 12.2 External File
Parameter Description
Degrees
TW Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of
the weld throat thickness or thickness t of the
thinner brace in inches
SWAP If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major
moment Mz is taken for In Plane Bending
(IPB). SWAP 1 uses the minor moment My as
the IPB.

Notes:

For overlap K-joints, the through brace is assumed to be the
same diameter as the brace being checked.
If any of the parameters for diameter and thickness specified
in the external file are less than that for members being
checked, then the member properties specified in the STAAD
file shall be used.
The member diameter and thickness should be used in API
equation (4.1-1); in this check it has been assumed that the
yield strength of the chord and brace members are the same.
The geometry file name is currently limited to eight characters
(4 if an extension as .txt is used).

The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists
of two steps. These steps are explained in section 12.16.
12.14 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out
punching shear checks. It can be used in initial runs for member
selection.

No classification of the joint is performed using the loading.

No hydrostatic checks are performed.

Section 12

12-13
12.15 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

a) Member refers to the member number for which the
b) TABLE refers to AISC steel section name which has been
checked against the steel code or has been selected.
c) RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or
FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk
(*) mark on front of the member.
d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code
e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable
stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0
or less will mean the member has passed.
f) LOADING provides the load case number which governed
the design.
g) FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local
Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis respectively.
Although STAAD does consider all the member forces
and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,
MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are
of interest, in most cases.
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of
the member to the section where design forces govern.
i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will
block out part of the table and will print the allowable
bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and
tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in
compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
Section 12

12-14
12.16 The Two-Step Process
The overall procedure for performing the code check per the API
code is as follows:

Step 1 Creating the geometry data file. This is done by
specifying the name of the geometry data file alongside the
command line CODE API. If a file name is not specified, STAAD
automatically assigns the file name APIPUN to the geometry data
file. The parameter instructions in the .std file should contain the
LEG parameter and it should be assigned the value 1.0.

Example Reading External Geometry File

UNIT INCHES KIPS
PARAMETERS
* All joint data will be written to external file GEOM1 for
punching shear.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 1.0
* Joints to be considered as T and Y, i.e. PUNCH is set to 3.0.
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

After ensuring that your STAAD input file contains the above
data, run the analysis. Once the analysis is completed, you will
find that a file by the name GEOM1 has been created and is
located in the same folder as the one where your .std file is
located. (In case you did not specify a file name - GEOM1 shown
in the earlier example - STAAD will create the file named
APIPUN.

Section 12

12-15
Step 2 The geometry data file (GEOM 1 or otherwise) should be
inspected and modified as required such as changing the PUNCH
values and local section properties for the punching shear checks.
Modify the .std file so it reruns the code check process by reading
the instructions of the GEOM file. This message is conveyed by
changing the value of the LEG parameter to 2.0. After making this
change, a re-analysis will result in the program using the
information in the geometry data file (GEOM1, APIPUN, or
otherwise) for performing the code check.

Example Reading an existing Joint Geometry Data File,
GEOM1

UNIT INCHES KIPS
PARAMETERS
* All joint data will be read from the external file GEOM1 for
punching shear.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 2.0
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

Section 12

12-16

International Codes 2004

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

International Codes 2004

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

STAAD.

C Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack

Вам также может понравиться